200

OWNER’S MANUAL



VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................113

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................311

STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................443

WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................543

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................587

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................659

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................665

INDEX .....................................................................677

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 INTRODUCTION ........................4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4

䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6

䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6

䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC

vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-

ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials

that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various

customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it

should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-

ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-

nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about

your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION 5

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against

operating procedures that could result in a collision or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss

important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-

tions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left

front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from

outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This

number also appears stamped under the right front seat

and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure

Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle

registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

6 INTRODUCTION

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

Stamped VIN Location

INTRODUCTION 7

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12

▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............12

▫ KeyFob ............................13

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........15

▫ General Information ....................16

䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................16

▫ Replacement Keys .....................18

▫ Customer Key Programming ..............18

▫ General Information ....................18

䡵

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19

▫ Rearming Of The System ................19

▫ To Arm The System ....................19

▫ To Disarm The System ..................20

▫ Tamper Alert .........................21

▫ Security System Manual Override ...........21

䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................21

䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........22

▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................23

▫ To Lock The Doors .....................24

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ...................24

▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................24

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......25

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........25

▫ General Information ....................27

䡵

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27

▫ How To Use Remote Start ................28

䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................31

▫ Manual Door Locks ....................31

▫ Power Door Locks .....................33

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —

Rear Doors ..........................34

䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO ..................36

▫ General Information ....................40

䡵 WINDOWS ...........................41

▫ Power Windows .......................41

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................44

䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .............45

䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING................46

▫ Trunk Emergency Release ................46

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........47

▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............47

▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................48

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........61

▫ Child Restraints .......................86

▫ Transporting Pets .....................107

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .107

䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................108

▫ Transporting Passengers .................108

▫ Exhaust Gas .........................109

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle .............................110

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle .........................112

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system

consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature

This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go

feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To

Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa-

tion).

Keyless Push Button Ignition

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with

the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating

positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate

when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and

ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,

ON/RUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the

push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may

have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up

method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put

the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the

Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and

push to operate the ignition.

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Key Fob

The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in

the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle

should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.

The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the

glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key

with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch

on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb

and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Keyless Push Button Ignition

1 — OFF

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key

into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Ignition Or Accessory On Message

When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in

ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to

remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the

chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display

in the cluster.

NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window

switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power

outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the

ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either

front door will cancel this feature. The time for this

feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-

move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the

vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

WARNING! (Continued)

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition

in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving

the vehicle unattended.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button

Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized

vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are

programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and

operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine

to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two

seconds if the engine controller does not receive the

proper authorization codes from the body control mod-

ule.

After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the

Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a

bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it

indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In

addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,

it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start

the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the

engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10

seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-

ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon

as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

• Do not make modifications or alterations to the

immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to

the immobilization system may result in a loss of

security protection.

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-

tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it

cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

always remember to place the ignition in the OFF

position.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a

blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob

is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-

tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an

authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors

for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-

thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-

dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the head-

lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the

Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.

Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to

disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn

off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off

after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will

rearm itself.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙

position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting

And Operating⬙ for further information).

Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

• Push the LOCK button on the interior power door

lock switch panel with the driver and/or passenger

door open.

• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry

Door Handle with a valid Key Fob (RKE) available in

the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙

in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for

further information).

• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of

the following methods:

• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if

equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in ⬙Things To

Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor-

mation).

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF

position.

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button

on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during

power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters

the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the

alarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior

power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle

and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery

becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Tamper Alert

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in

your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the

exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the

doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the

doors or open any door.

Manual Door Lock Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the

outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,

or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is

cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-

tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the

⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the

dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position

(extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,

open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-

tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held

Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does

not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the

system.

NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above

disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-

ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock The Doors

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal

lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The

illuminated entry system will also turn on.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Flash Lights With Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when

the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This

feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the

current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

Headlight Illumination On Approach

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds

when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles

equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set-

ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and

the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Sound Horn With Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be

turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,

refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Unlatch The Trunk

Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two

times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold

the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one

second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,

the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,

and the interior lights will turn on.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a

second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH

(24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition

in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic

Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and

horn will remain on.

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the

vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the

Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted

by the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back

housing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical

latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways

with your thumb and then pull the key out with your

other hand.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade

screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves

of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage

the seal during removal.

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a

solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the

battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign

on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery

clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the

Emergency Key Removal Separating The RKE Transmitter Case

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it

with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two

halves together.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Key Fob with Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the

engine conveniently from outside the vehicle

while still maintaining security. The system has

a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic

transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may

reduce this range.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the

engine will remote start:

• Vehicle in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Trunk closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• RKE panic button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle Security Alarm not active

• Ignition in OFF position

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-

jury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls

could cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument

Cluster Display

The following messages will display in the instrument

cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote

start prematurely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset

• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired

The instrument cluster message stays active until the

ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the REMOTE START button

on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-

onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking

lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice

(if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the

vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a

15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof op-

eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is

in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,

the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before

you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or

allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will

disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for

two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the

doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,

push and release the START/STOP button (vehicles

equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).

NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start

Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)

will display in the instrument cluster until you push the

START button.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door

trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the

inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door

lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the

rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red

indicator is visible.

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)

when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,

make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before

closing the door.

Manual Door Lock Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock

the trunk.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of a

collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-

move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the

vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on each of the front

door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the

doors and trunk.

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the

Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-

ing Your Vehicle” for further information.

If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition

is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door

is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents

you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.

Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the

door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and

Power Door Lock Switches

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime

will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically

when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The

auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your

authorized dealer per written request of the customer.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with

power door locks if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-

abled.

2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to

0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in

PARK.

3. The driver door is opened.

4. The doors were not previously unlocked.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature

in accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear

Doors

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the

rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child-

Protection Door Lock system.

The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the

rear edge of the door.

1. Open the rear door.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flat-

bladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise ap-

proximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or

counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated

by the stamped icons).

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged.

Lock Child Protection Door Lock

Unlock Child Protection Door Lock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

pull the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED

position), roll down the window, and open the door with

the outside door handle.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a

feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to

lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to

push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-

sponse time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door

is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock

and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver

door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.

The interior door panel lock knob will toggle when the

door is unlocked.

NOTE: If “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” is

programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold

of the drivers door handle. To select between “ 1st Press

of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press of Key Fob

Unlocks Driver Door,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front

passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-

cally. The interior door panel lock knob will toggle when

the door is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger

door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door

unlock preference setting (“1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks

All Doors” or “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks Driver

Door”).

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Transmitter In Vehicle

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door

unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch

is in the OFF position.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.

There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe

search in any passive entry vehicle.

• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitter while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door

handle while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while

the door is open.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are

shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does

not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the

car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.

NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors a valid

Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the

vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is

detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock

the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock

knobs.

• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside

the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive

Entry door handle.

• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the

door panel switch and then close the doors.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Enter The Trunk

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft

(1.0 m) of the decklid, push the button located on the

light bar between the license plate lamps.

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive

Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the

decklid, the decklid will automatically unlatch, unless

another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-

ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the

decklid.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door

handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all

four doors.

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door

handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

NOTE:

•

After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you must

wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,

using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to

allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the

door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE

transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE

transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the

vehicle’s interior door panel.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver’s door control all the

door windows.

Power Window Controls

1 — Window Lockout Switch

2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls

3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

There are single window controls on each passenger door

trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.

The window controls will operate only when the ignition

is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the

power window switches will remain active for up to 10

minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.

Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The

time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do

not let children play with power windows. Do not

leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-

larly unattended children, can become entrapped by

the windows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

Driver One Touch Down

The driver door power window switch has an auto down

feature. Push the window switch to the second detent

and release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, push the window switch

to the first detent and release it when you want the

window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Windows Express Up And Down — If

Equipped

Express Down

Push the switch to the second detent and release. The

window will go down automatically.

Manual Down

Push and hold the switch to the first detent and release

when you want the window to stop.

Express Up

Lift the switch to the second detent and release. The

window will go up automatically.

Manual Up

Lift the switch to the first detent and release when you

want the window to stop.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-

closure, it will reverse direction and then go back

down. Remove the obstacle and use the window

switch again to close the window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger

the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-

closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the

first detent and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window

may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Make sure the door is fully closed.

2. Pull the window switch up to close the window

completely and continue to hold the switch up for an

additional two seconds after the window is closed.

3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

detent to open the window completely and continue

to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds

after the window is fully open.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim

panel allows you to disable the window controls on the

rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,

push and release the window lockout button (setting it in

the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,

push and release the window lockout button again

(setting it in the UP position).

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, then open the front and rear

windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the

buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-

roof opening to minimize the buffeting.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by

pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the

instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the

button will operate.

The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by

pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using

the external release switch located on the underside of

the decklid overhang. The release feature will function

only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.

With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk

Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster

indicating that the trunk is open. The EVIC/DID display

will reappear once the trunk is closed.

With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open

symbol will display until the trunk is closed.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in this section for more

information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry

feature.

Trunk Release Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or

through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the

trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in

the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,

even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped

in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or

heat stroke.

Trunk Emergency Release

As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release

lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the

event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the

trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark

handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

Trunk Emergency Release

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should

be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-

dren who do not use child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled

up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it

properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your

vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the

side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space

between occupants and the door and occupants could

be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact

the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided

under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and could cause a collision that includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle

their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-

ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN

position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first

turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent

chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or

outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the

ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN

position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and

remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the

vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range

and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-

buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by

blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an

intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence

has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain

on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the

driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat

belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-

pants to buckle their seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,

the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat

belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy

object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the

seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that

pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet

harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,

and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-

rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-

vating BeltAlert.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver

or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-

board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until

the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts

are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-

der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-

led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If

you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have

it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-

nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

•

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.

A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal

injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear

the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest

bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

(Continued)

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect

the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and

pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces

the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed

position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the

webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to

create a fold that begins immediately above the latch

plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of

the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or

squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that serves you

best.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down

to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing or squeezing the release but-

ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull

downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

locked into position.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when

the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper

shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest

position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used

only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the

Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-

pant, it must be removed.

Adjustable Anchorage

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

required in order to properly fit the original seat

belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender

if, when worn, the distance between the front edge

of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of

the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increase the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the

lap belt is not long enough and only use in the

recommended seating positions. Remove and store

the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an

accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child

if they are wearing a seat belt.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen

and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the

shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under

the arm .

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning

devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners

work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or

a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of

a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly

that is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below

defines the type of feature for each seating position.

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the

seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate

the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out

only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably

wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-

matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to

remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a

seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be

properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-

ture or any other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

(Continued)

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraints that have a harness for restraining

the child.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster

Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger

Knee Air Bag

3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air

Bag

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front

passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon

seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat

belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

Advanced Air Bag Features

This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger

Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed

to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output

appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as

determined by the OCS.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,

because any such objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may

damage the air bags and you could be injured

because the air bags may no longer be functional.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are

designed to open only when the air bags are

inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-

ways wear your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk

of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes

with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large

quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front

Passenger Seat

The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for

this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-

vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-

pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the

following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor

located in the front passenger seat

• Air Bag Warning Light

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located

underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-

cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any

weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM

uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-

senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-

nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may

reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In

order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important

for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-

erly wearing the seat belt.

The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the

inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if

the OCS estimates that:

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very

light objects on it; or

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-

senger, including a child; or

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing

child restraint; or

• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her

weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

Front Passenger Seat Oc-

cupant Status

Front Passenger Air

Bag Output

Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power de-

ployment

Child, including a child in

a forward-facing child re-

straint or booster seat*

Reduced-power de-

ployment OR Full-

power deployment

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Passenger Seat Oc-

cupant Status

Front Passenger Air

Bag Output

Properly seated adult Full-power deployment

OR reduced-power de-

ployment

Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-

ployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,

allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front

passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,

including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-

senger seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

• Children 12 years or younger should always ride

buckled up in a rear seat.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable

classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on

the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.

The OCS communicates the classification status to the

ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine

whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation

rate should be adjusted.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is

important for the front passenger to be seated properly

and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated

passengers are:

• Sitting upright

• Facing forward

• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-

ably on or near the floor

• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the

seatback in an upright position

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)

When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,

occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce

the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working

improperly.

Seated Properly

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s

seated weight on the front passenger seat

The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly

positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so

may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-

mines the most probable classification of the occupant

that it detects.

The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or

increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted

inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in

a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working

improperly.

Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the

front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power

deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.

Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the

front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-

ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.

Examples of improper front passenger seating include:

• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another

part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-

ment panel).

• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns

to face the rear of the vehicle.

• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright

position.

• The front passenger carries or holds an object while

seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).

• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.

• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat

and center console.

• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the

front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger

seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front

passenger’s seated weight.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable

classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is

seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output

signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s

properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

WARNING!

• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated

improperly, the occupant may provide an output

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-

pant’s properly seated weight input. This may

result in serious injury or death in a collision.

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with

the seatback in an upright position, your back

against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-

ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet

comfortably on or near the floor.

• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,

boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.

Holding an object may provide an output signal to

the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-

erly seated weight input, which may result in

serious injury or death in a collision.

• Placing an object on the floor under the front

passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working

(Continued)

Not Seated Properly

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

properly, which may result in serious injury or

death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the

floor under the front passenger seat.

The Air Bag Warning Light

in the instrument panel

will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the

front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS

may affect the operation of the air bag system.

If the Air Bag Warning Light

does not come on, or

stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as

you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service immediately.

The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-

ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly

classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the

OCS components must function as designed.

Do not make any modifications to the front passenger

seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the

seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,

take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA LLC

approved seat accessories may be used.

The following requirements must be strictly followed:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or

components in any way.

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or

cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the

specific model being repaired. Always use the correct

seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.

• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an

aftermarket seat cover or cushion.

• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener

be modified or replaced with any part except those

which are approved by FCA US LLC.

WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to

the passenger seat assembly, its related components,

seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the

air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This

could result in death or serious injury to the front

passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A

modified vehicle may not comply with required

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)

and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(CMVSS).

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-

pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee

Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver

Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the

steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air

Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove

compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide

enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working

together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced

Front Air Bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-

BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover

events, in addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard

side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

through the seat seam into the space between the occupant

and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and

with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they

are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the

area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater

risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could be

pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim

covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries

to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side

impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and

body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-

dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the

trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs

inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are

not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned

in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!

•

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-

dows where the SABIC and its deployment path

are located should remain free from any obstruc-

tions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any

accessory items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your

vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the

vehicle for any reason.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover

events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-

termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in

a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously

injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should

never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat

that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

(Continued)

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on

the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require

Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the

Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact

deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side

impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during

angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover

events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-

priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover

event may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the

seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-

sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the

vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the

seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,

on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a

near rollover event.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-

tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a

carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by

contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and

normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed

significantly within a few days, or if you have any

blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air

bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the

skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-

ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air

bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-

diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,

but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light

button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System

functions after an event, the ignition switch must be

changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition

OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the

engine compartment and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system

and starting the engine.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection

in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-

ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and

interconnecting wiring associated with air bag

system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in

the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag

system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds

for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to

the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-

function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag

Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A

single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on

again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-

tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition

the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags

to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in

the on position, and stays on after you start the

vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-

ately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,

which could affect the Supplemental Restraint

System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warn-

ing Light will illuminate on the instrument

panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single

chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.

If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on

intermittently or remains on while driving have an

authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For

additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of

this manual.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the air bag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the air bag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-

ecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to

hold even an infant on your lap could become so

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

great that you could not hold the child, no matter

how strong you are. The child and others could be

badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle

should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the

instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s

Manual and on all the labels attached to the child

restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has

a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install

it in the vehicle where you will use it.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

•

For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or

call 1–866–732–8243.

•

Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s

website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/

motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or

Age

Recommended Type Of Child

Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or

younger and who have not

reached the height or weight limits

of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-

vertible Child Restraint, facing

rearward in the rear seat of the

vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two

years old or who have out-grown

the height or weight limit of their

rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

with a five-point Harness, facing

forward in the rear seat of the

vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Child Size, Height, Weight Or

Age

Recommended Type Of Child

Restraint

Larger Children Children who have out-grown

their forward-facing child restraint,

but are too small to properly fit

the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and

the vehicle seat belt, seated in the

rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Re-

straints

Children 12 years old or younger,

who have out-grown the height or

weight limit of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear

seat of the vehicle

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing

in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they

reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing

child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It

is recommended for children from birth until they reach the

weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible

child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing

in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher

weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers

do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have

outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least

two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until

they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their

convertible child seat.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown

their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-

facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and

convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for

as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height

allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a

belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over

the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held

in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

WARNING! (Continued)

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting

the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-

ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it

loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this

simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front

of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the

way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching

the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,

move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use

a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child

correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages

located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s

seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol : 2 anchorages per

seating position

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child restraint)

for using the LATCH anchorage sys-

tem to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system un-

til the combined weight of the child

and the child restraint is 65 lbs

(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether

anchor instead of the LATCH anchor-

age system once the combined weight

is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the

seat belt be used together to attach a

rear-facing or forward-facing child re-

straint?

No Do not use the seat belt when you use

the LATCH anchorage system to attach

a rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraint.

Can a child seat be installed in the

center position using the inner LATCH

lower anchorages?

Yes You can install child restraints with

flexible lower anchors in the center

position. The inner anchorages are 17.7

inches (450 mm) apart. Do not install

child restraints with rigid lower an-

chors in the center position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can two child restraints be attached

using a common lower LATCH an-

chorage?

No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage

with two or more child restraints. If

the center position does not have dedi-

cated LATCH lower anchorages, use

the seat belt to install a child seat in

the center position next to a child seat

using the LATCH anchorages in an

outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passenger

seat?

Yes The child seat may touch the back of

the front passenger seat if the child

restraint manufacturer also allows con-

tact. See your child restraint owner’s

manual for more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-

bols on the seatback. They are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the

gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

Locating Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located in the panel be-

tween the rear seatback and the rear window.

They are found under a plastic cover with the

tether anchorage symbol on it.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower

anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

Tether Strap Anchorages

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end

to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-

ments in the center seating position. Only install this type

of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child

restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-

ments can be installed in any rear seating position.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-

compatible child restraints next to each other, you

must use the seat belt for the center position. You can

then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard

positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-

Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-

stallation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not

all child restraint systems will be installed as described

here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat

belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”

to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more

easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward

to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-

ing position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack

in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being

used by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,

buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with

the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock

the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with

them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat

belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not

necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking

Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-

ditional information on ALR.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the Tether Anchor

with the seat belt to attach a for-

ward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when

using the seat belt to install a for-

ward facing child restraint, up to

the recommended weight limit of

the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes Contact between the front passen-

ger seat and the child restraint is

allowed, if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Yes All head restraints may be re-

moved.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten the seat belt against the

seat belt path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a

seating position with an ALR re-

tractor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing

out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract

back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you

will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is

now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat

to any location in front of the car seat, including the

seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating position,

located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the

section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you

plan to install the child restraint to find the

tether anchorage. You may need to move the

seat forward to provide better access to the

tether anchorage. If there is no top tether

anchorage for that seating position, move

the child restraint to another position in the

vehicle if one is available.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly

behind the seat where you are placing the child

restraint.

3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If

your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head

restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint.

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

Tether Strap Mounting

1 — Cover

3 — Attaching Strap

A — Tether Strap Hook

B — Tether Anchor

106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly

behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove

slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes

should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions

under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-

mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-

nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil

in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its

first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and

not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is

set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation

mode.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat

belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light

will turn on for four to

eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch

is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,

have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as

soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a

single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning

Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault

is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-

able.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your

vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-

ing with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the

pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have

been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-

jects can become trapped under the brake pedal

and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle

control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of

control of the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if

equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause

should be located and corrected immediately.

112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 MIRRORS ............................120

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .120

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .121

▫ Outside Mirrors ......................128

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........128

▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach

Lighting — If Equipped .................128

▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory

Seat Only) — If Equipped ...............129

▫ Power Mirrors .......................129

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........130

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .131

䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................132

▫ Rear Cross Path.......................137

▫ Modes Of Operation ...................139

▫ General Information....................140

䡵 SEATS ..............................140

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............141

▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped .............144

▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........146

▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......147

▫ Head Restraints ......................148

▫ Folding Rear Seat .....................152

䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .153

▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........154

▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless

Entry Transmitter To Memory .............155

▫ Memory Position Recall .................156

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................156

䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........157

䡵 LIGHTS .............................159

▫ Headlight Switch .....................159

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......160

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) .............160

▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................160

▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped ...........................161

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....162

▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................163

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............163

▫ Multifunction Lever ...................164

▫ Turn Signals .........................165

▫ Lane Change Assist ....................165

▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................165

▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................165

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ..............166

▫ Interior Lights .......................167

▫ Battery Saver Feature ..................169

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......170

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............170

▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............171

▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............172

▫ Mist ...............................173

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........174

䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .175

䡵

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .176

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —

IF EQUIPPED .........................177

▫ To Activate ..........................178

▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................179

▫ To Deactivate ........................179

▫ To Resume Speed .....................179

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............179

▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............181

䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................182

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .184

▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .185

▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................186

▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............187

▫ To Cancel ...........................187

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

▫ ToTurnOff..........................188

▫ To Resume ..........................188

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............189

▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......191

▫ Overtake Aid ........................195

▫ ACC Operation At Stop .................195

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......196

▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........197

▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......200

▫ General Information....................204

▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed

Control Mode ........................205

䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH

MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ............209

▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With

Mitigation Operation ...................209

▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............211

▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .212

▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................213

▫ Service FCW Warning ..................213

䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............214

▫ LaneSense Operation ...................214

▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............215

▫ LaneSense Warning Message..............216

▫ Changing LaneSense Status ..............220

䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED .........................220

▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................221

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............221

▫ ParkSense Display .....................222

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........226

▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist

System .............................227

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........227

▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions ........227

䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK

ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .................229

▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................231

▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............232

▫ ParkSense Display .....................232

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........241

▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .242

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........243

▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions ........243

䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED .........................245

▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active

Park Assist System.....................246

▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance

Operation/Display.....................248

▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance

Operation/Display.....................258

䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —

IF EQUIPPED .........................268

䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................271

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ..............272

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

▫ Sunglass Bin Door ....................273

䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .274

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .276

▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............277

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........279

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......280

▫ Using HomeLink .....................282

▫ Security ............................282

▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................282

▫ General Information....................283

䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........284

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............285

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........286

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............286

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........286

▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................286

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............286

▫ Sunshade Operation....................287

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................287

▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................287

▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................287

䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —

IF EQUIPPED .........................288

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............289

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........289

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............290

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........290

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............290

▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ..........290

▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .....291

▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ...........291

▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ......291

▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................291

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................292

▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................292

▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................292

䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED .........293

䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........296

䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................297

▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................297

▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ..................298

䡵 STORAGE ............................299

▫ Glove Compartment ...................299

▫ Console Features .....................300

▫ Door Storage .........................303

▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .304

䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................304

▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear

Seat — If Equipped ....................304

▫ Grocery Bag Hooks ....................307

▫ Ski Pass-Through......................308

䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............308

▫ Rear Window Defroster .................308

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right

for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to

center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced

by moving the small control under the mirror to the night

position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror

should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward

the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right

for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to

center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you.

NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-

abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear

view viewing.

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned

On or Off through the touchscreen.

• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the

feature On.

• Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn

the feature Off.

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and

a 9-1-1 button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if

you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or

3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only

be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active

and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)

or 3G(data) network.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you

to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a

tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-

nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance

will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.

Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.

• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support

for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile

features.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other

vehicle issues.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

9-1-1 Call

1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,

there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call

system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the

9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the

Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the

Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off

the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1

buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a

connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1

operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit

the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1

operator:

• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• The vehicle brand.

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator

through the vehicle audio system to determine if

additional help is needed.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s

9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1

operator may be able to open a voice connection with

the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.

Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection

with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator

should be able to speak with you or other vehicle

occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.

The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-

main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the

9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.

5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergency responders and provide them with impor-

tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,

fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions

or location), do not wait for voice contact from a

9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle

immediately and move to a safe location.

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s

operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and

GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal

reception, which can prevent your vehicle from

placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/

data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-

tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function

properly.

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-

cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket

(Continued)

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a

signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-

ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,

never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way

mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your

vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas

on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-

TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING

DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE

UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,

AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system

could cause the air bag system to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air bag system

is not there to help protect you.

9-1-1 Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1

Call system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and

Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.

If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the

following may occur at the time the malfunction is

detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST

and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated

red.

• The Device Screen will display the following message

“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your

dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-

vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you

will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview

Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized

dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on

the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel

if a malfunction in any part of the system is

detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-

nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-

pant Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors

beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the

9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not

limited to, the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active.

• The ignition is in the OFF position.

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are

damaged during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-

nected during a vehicle crash.

• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global

Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-

structed.

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.

• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.

• Weather.

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could

prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal

reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-

ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or

3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is

required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight

overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will

give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the

lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either

forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have

three detent positions:

• Full forward position

• Full rearward position

• Normal position

Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach

Lighting — If Equipped

Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal

and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.

Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,

which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in

the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard

Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which

turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This

LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent

to the Front and Rear Doors.

The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30

seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the

ignition is placed into the RUN position.

NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the

shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.

Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory

Seat Only) — If Equipped

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror

positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the

ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will

move slightly downward from the present position when

the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will

then return to the original position when the vehicle is

shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory

setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse

position.

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned

on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in

Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Power Mirrors

The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s

door trim panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-

tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a

mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select

the mirror that you want to adjust.

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four

arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to

move.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the

rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for further information.

Power Mirror Control

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use

the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the

mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-

cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.

Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped

This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-

ing the visor to block out the sun.

1. Fold down the sun visor.

2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.

3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to

extend it.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-

based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to

detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,

motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the

rear/front/side of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will

momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors

to let the driver know that the system is operational.

The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in

any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode

when the vehicle is in PARK.

Rear Detection Zones

BSM Warning Light

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane

width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The

zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and

extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear

bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the

detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the

vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or

higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE: The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about

rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-

tion zones.

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are

located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road

contamination so that the BSM system can function

properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where

the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-

per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the

detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light

located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an

audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.

Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three

different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to

see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an

alert during these types of zone entries.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either

side of the vehicle.

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either

side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative

speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed

of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in

the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning

light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed

between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph

(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on

stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,

berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert

on such objects. This is normal operation and your

vehicle does not require service.

Overtaking/Approaching

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are

traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in

adjacent lanes.

Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to

help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-

clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s

mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn

signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can

result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the

driver when backing out of parking spaces where the

vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed

slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the

rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will

then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an

oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.

Opposing Traffic

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of

the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of

the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately

3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of

approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot

situations.

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can

be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the

sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the

system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the

driver is alerted using both the visual and audible

alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.

It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an

oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers

must be careful when backing up, even when using

RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestri-

ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind

spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

RCP Detection Zones

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM

system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side

view mirror based on a detected object. However, when

the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,

the system will respond with both visual and audible

alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an

audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,

the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-

priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the

turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an

alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime

will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-

tected object are present on the same side at the same

time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In

addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be

muted.

NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the

BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with

both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is

present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio

is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the

RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no

visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP

systems.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating

mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle

is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and

used.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency

that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by

other than an authorized service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Seats — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s

seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard

side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the

seat up, down, forward or rearward.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat

will move in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or

down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of

the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in

the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the

desired position has been reached.

Power Seat Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward

The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.

Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The

seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when the desired position has been reached.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Power Seat Recliner Switch

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver’s seat may be

equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch

is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push

the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease

the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or down-

ward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Power Lumbar Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

Manual Seats — If Equipped

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment

On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting

bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the

seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have

reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,

move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that

the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

Front Seat Adjustment

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired

position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift

the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Recline Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by

using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.

Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push

downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The front heated seats control buttons are located within

the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control

buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated seat button

once to turn the HI

setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button

a second time to turn

the LO setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button

a third time to turn

the heating elements OFF.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-

matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-

utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display

will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The

LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-

proximately 45 minutes.

Seat Height Adjustment

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats

to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

heated seats can be programed to come on during a

remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must exercise care

when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-

ture of the seat.

Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that

draw the air from the passenger compartment and move

air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help

keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher

ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,

HI and LO.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located

within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the

control buttons through the climate screen or the controls

screen.

• Press the ventilated seat button

once to choose HI.

• Press the ventilated seat button

a second time to

choose LO.

• Press the ventilated seat button

a third time to

turn the ventilated seat OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated

seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a

remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-

pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted

or removed could cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the

rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to

gain additional clearance to the back of your head.

Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with

Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear

impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward

minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s

head and the RHR.

The RHRs will automatically return to their normal

position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not

return to their normal position see your authorized

dealer immediately.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and

push downward on the head restraint.

NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it

can go then push the release button and the adjustment

button at the base of each post while pulling the head

restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to

fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head

restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and

push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the

appropriate height.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-

sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or

death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely

stow removed head restraints in a location outside

the occupant compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow

the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-

ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive

Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-

table DVD players. These items may interfere with

the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the

event of a collision and could result in serious

injury or death.

Front Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Head Restraints

The rear outboard head restraints have three positions

Up, Mid and Down. The center head restraint has only

two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is

being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised

position. When there is no occupant in the center seat, the

head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for

the driver.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and

push downward on the head restraint.

NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it

can go then push the release button and the adjustment

button at the base of each post while pulling the head

restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head

restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then

adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the

re-installation instructions above prior to operating

the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can

be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either

or both seatbacks.

When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,

be sure the seatback is latched.

Rear Seat Release Loops

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper stabil-

ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-

erly latched seat could cause serious injury.

• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear

seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down posi-

tion) should not be used as a play area by children.

They could be seriously injured in a collision.

Children should be seated and using the proper

restraint system.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different

memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory

switch. Each memory profile contains desired position

settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of

desired radio station presets.

The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door

panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to

activate the memory save function, the number (1)

memory button and the number (2) memory button. The

memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the

two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the

appropriate number button on the switch.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Programming The Memory Feature

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an

existing profile from memory.

1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).

3. Push and release the SET button on the memory

switch, then push the number (1) button within five

seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will

display which memory position is being set.

If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into

memory as follows:

1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).

3. Push and release the SET button on the memory

switch, then push the number (2) button within five

seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory

position is being set.

Driver Memory Switch

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in

PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a

memory profile.

• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer

to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter To Memory” in this section.

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter To Memory

Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be

programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed

memory profiles with a push of the UNLOCK button on

the RKE transmitter.

NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you

must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the

Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-

ing:

1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.

2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer

to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for

instructions on how to set a memory profile.

3. Push and release the SET button on the memory

switch, then within five seconds push and release the

button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile

Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans-

mitter within 10 seconds.

NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your

memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, followed

by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter

within 10 seconds.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory

positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not

in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.

To recall the memory settings for driver one, push

MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on

the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory settings for driver two, push

MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on

the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY

buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is

cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of

one second will occur before another recall can be

selected.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where

you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the

vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.

• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF

position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60

mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than

or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The seat will return to its previously set position when

you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN

position.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the

driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)

forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no

benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit

or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy

Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when

the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy

Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through

the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer

to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-

tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two levers must be released.

1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument

panel and in front of the driver’s door.

2. Move to the front of the vehicle.

Hood Release Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and

push and hold the safety latch lever to the right.

4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center

of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

Safety Latch Lever Location

Safety Latch Lever

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of

the instrument panel. This switch controls the

operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-

matic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,

instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog

lights — if equipped.

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent

for parking light and instrument panel light operation.

Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for

headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-

eration.

Headlight Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,

rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for

automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,

the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means

the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you

place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the

automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of

the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-

lights will come on in the automatic mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is

placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature

is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off

when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by

this feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be

turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination

for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your

vehicle in an unlit area.

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF

position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off

the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval

begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place

the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the

delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will

turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE:

• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of

placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this

feature.

• The headlight delay time is programmable using the

Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system

provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-

ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera

mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera

detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches

from high beams to low beams until the approaching

vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be

turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights

of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to

remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

and other obstructions on the windshield or camera

lens will cause the system to function improperly.

• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-

ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam

Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-

beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of

ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon

ignition off.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp

Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed

to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized

dealer.

To Activate

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight

position.

2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward

front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is

at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).

To Deactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward

in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal

operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the

system.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the

engine is running, and the transmission is not in the

PARK position. The lights will remain on until the

ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the

parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be

used for normal nighttime driving.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the

vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can

be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition

is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert

the driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is built into the headlight

switch.

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking

lights or the low beam headlights and push the

headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either

push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the

headlight switch.

Fog Light Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates

when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam

headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the

high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn

signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The

multifunction lever is located on the left side of the

steering column.

Multifunction Lever

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is

a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light

bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/

DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle

is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn

signal on.

• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn

signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will

turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn

signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will

turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever

toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is

released.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Front Map/Reading Lights

The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-

head console.

Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons

There are two map/reading light buttons located in the

center of the overhead console that allow the lights to

operate independently.

Push the button once to turn the light on.

To turn the light off, push the button a second time.

Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses

The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-

dently by pushing the lenses.

Push the lens once to turn the light on.

To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.

NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.

The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on

the RKE is pushed.

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off

automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to

the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights

were switched on manually or are on because a door is

open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk

light. To restore interior light operation, either place the

ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light

switch.

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the

headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the

instrument panel.

Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the

instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase

the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Ambient Light Control — If Equipped

Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-

ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-

ent light located in the overhead console, door handle

lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and

cubby bin lights.

Instrument Panel Dimmer

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dome Light Position

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely

upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.

The interior lights will remain on when the instrument

panel dimmer control is in this position.

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex-

treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will

remain off when the doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to

the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays

such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the

position lights or headlights are on.

Battery Saver Feature

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off

automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is

moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the

interior lights were switched on manually or are on

because a door is open.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the

windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the

steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotat-

ing a switch, located on the end of the lever.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent

positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low

wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper

operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal

operation of the windshield wipers the following mes-

sage will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID):

⬙Front Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Wind-

shield⬙. It is important to remove the snow accumulation

to allow the wipers to function normally and to maintain

good visibility of the road.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is

turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”

position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when

weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a

variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving

speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be

regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds

between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second

(fourth detent).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph

(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and

hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in

the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate

for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then

resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

Intermittent Wiper Operation

Windshield Washer Operation

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off

position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,

then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Mist

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make

occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever

upward to the Mist position and release for a single

wiping cycle.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the

windshield. The wash function must be used in order to

spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The

feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings

to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least

sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most

sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain

conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver

desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if

the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch

in the OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly

when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-

shield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off

using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the

wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the

following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is

first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-

perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the

ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in

the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will

not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle

speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift

lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL

position.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped

with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are

not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start

mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed

the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing

wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and

no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control

handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of

the steering column.

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle

down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering

wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or

shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel

outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering

column in position, push the control handle up until fully

engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious injury or

death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps

warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering

wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated

steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to

120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated

steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on

when the steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located within

the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control

button through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated steering wheel button

once to

turn the heating element ON.

• Press the heated steering wheel button

a second

time to turn the heating element OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated

steering wheel to operate.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on

during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer

to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion, or other physical conditions must exercise

care when using the steering wheel heater. It may

cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if

used for long periods.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering

wheel covers of any type and material. This may

cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed

control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,

push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL

2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL

3 — RESUME

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)

button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the

SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the

accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected

speed.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the

vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-

out erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button

and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the SET + button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET - button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you

could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving

convenience provided by cruise control while traveling

on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a

safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.

Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.

Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in

light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant

need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar

sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a

vehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,

ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will

apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed

the original set speed) automatically to maintain a

preset following distance, while matching the speed of

the vehicle ahead.

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an

appropriate distance between vehicles.

• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode

for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional

information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control Mode” in this section.

NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control

will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of

the mode selected.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control

buttons. The two control modes function differently.

Always confirm which mode is selected.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience

system. It is not a substitute for active driving

involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-

ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather

conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle

ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to

ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road

conditions. Your complete attention is always re-

quired while driving to maintain safe control of

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can

result in a collision and death or serious personal

injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ACC system:

• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,

and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a

traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-

tions into account, and may be limited upon

adverse sight distance conditions.

• Does not always fully recognize complex driving

conditions, which can result in wrong or missing

distance warnings.

• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while

following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle

for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within

3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,

and the ACC system will be cancelled.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

WARNING! (Continued)

You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,

heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,

in highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;

when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-

covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill

slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a

constant speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the

steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

2 — SET+/ACCEL

3 — RESUME

4 — SET-/DECEL

5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE

6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF

7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE

8 — CANCEL

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications

to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive

Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above

0 mph (0 km/h).

The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph

(32 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the READY state,

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC

Ready.”

When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following

conditions:

• When you apply the brakes.

• When the parking brake is set.

• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-

VERSE or NEUTRAL.

• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.

• When the brakes are overheated.

• When the driver door is open.

• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID

displays “ACC Ready.”

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this

time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will

display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system

on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-

tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you

want. You could lose control and have a collision.

Always leave the system off when you are not using

it.

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the

SET + button or the SET - button and release. The

EVIC/DID will display the set speed.

If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below

20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to

20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle

speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be

the current speed of the vehicle.

NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle

in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do

not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set

speed. If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in

the EVIC/DID.

• The system will not be controlling the distance be-

tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle

speed will only be determined by the position of the

accelerator pedal.

To Cancel

The following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANCEL button is pushed.

• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the

Drive position.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-

tem (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.

• Driver door is opened at low speeds.

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and clear the set speed in

memory if:

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button

is pushed.

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

ON/OFF button is pushed.

• The ignition is turned OFF.

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)

button and then remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two

seconds, then the driver will either have to push the

RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to

reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle

in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic

and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed

(Continued)

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and

road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate

or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to

follow these warnings can result in a collision and

death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by

pushing the SET + button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID.

To Decrease Speed

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by

pushing the SET - button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID.

NOTE:

•

When you override and push the SET + button or SET -

buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of

the vehicle.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the

engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle

sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system

will automatically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop

when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle

follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two

seconds the driver will either have to push the RES

(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to

reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up

hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting

may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-

hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-

tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the

ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature

exceeds normal range (overheated).

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by

varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),

three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).

Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC

calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This

distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —

Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed,

the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-

ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button

is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar

(shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the

set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the

same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle

Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed

automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless

of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set

speed.

• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of

the sensor.

• The distance setting is changed.

• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on

ACC Activation).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-

ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if

necessary.

NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the

ACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts

that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to

maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert

“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will

sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum

braking capacity.

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-

ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily

mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is

applying the brakes autonomously.

Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-

hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration

up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.

This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver

utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when

passing on the left hand side.

ACC Operation At Stop

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to

a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target

vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle

coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion

without the need for any driver action.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within two

seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver

will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or

apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the

existing Set Speed.

Brake Alert

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a

standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the

parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will

be cancelled.

While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the

driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,

the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system

will be cancelled.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must

ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or

objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow

these warnings can result in a collision and death or

serious personal injury.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-

tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the

instrument cluster. The information it displays depends

on ACC system status.

Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of

the following displays in the EVIC/DID:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-

tive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has

not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering

wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the

instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC

activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected

after five seconds of no ACC display activity

Display Warnings And Maintenance

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”

Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

warning will display and also a chime will indicate when

conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as

in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become

temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,

dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and

the system will deactivate.

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

message can sometimes be displayed while driving in

highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or

ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when

the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path

this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control is still available. For additional information refer

to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this

section.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of

an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the

vehicle behind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-

tant to note the following maintenance items:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the

sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage

the sensor lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so

could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and

require a sensor realignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due

to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.

•

Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,

including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Do-

ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no

longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by

simply reactivating it.

NOTE:

•

If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every

trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,

have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-

market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-

mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit

ACC/FCW operation.

“Clean Front Windshield” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-

shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate

when conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in

snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also

become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as

mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of

glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display “ACC/

FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and

the system will have degraded performance.

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while

driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW

system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.

Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking

any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may

temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine the windshield and the camera located on the

back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may

require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

When the condition that created limited functionality is

no longer present, the system will return to full function-

ality.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean

Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more

than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or

other obstruction, have the windshield and forward

facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/

FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an

internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that

limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still

drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-

rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again

later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,

see your authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection

issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-

edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to

intervene.

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is

offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging

in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance

to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and

out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to

brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system

may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for

stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once

the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume

your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC

system functionality.

NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turn Or Bend Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in

your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic

conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-

mance may be limited.

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the

lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,

ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and

it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC

system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until

it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient

distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-

tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

ACC Hill Example

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of

the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they

have moved fully into the lane. There may not be

sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicle Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary

vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations

where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and

the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be

attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency

that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by

other than an authorized service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal

(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available

for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)

Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a

set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate

the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be

operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To change between the different control modes, push the

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button

which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the

NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-

TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-

ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-

trol mode.

WARNING!

In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will

not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity

warning does not activate and no alarm will sound

even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since

neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the

vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to

maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is

selected.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic

Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has

reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or

SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-

erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-

TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what

speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is SET.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-

trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +

button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of

U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID display.

To Decrease Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,

you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed

of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID display.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

To Cancel

The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed

Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the

memory:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANCEL button is pushed.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-

tem (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-

heated).

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the

Drive position.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button

and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h).

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in

memory if:

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

ON/OFF button is pushed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is

pushed.

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH

MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation

Operation

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with

mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,

visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply

a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential

frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are

intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,

avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward

looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller

(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.

When the system determines that a forward collision is

probable, the driver will be provided with audible and

visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.

If the driver does not take action based upon these

progressive warnings, then the system will provide a

limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle

and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver

reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-

mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by

braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the

system will compensate and provide additional brake

force as required.

If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event

begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system

may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate

the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision

Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-

pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for

two seconds and then release the brakes.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle

in front of you is no longer probable, the warning

message will be deactivated.

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph

(2 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than

vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the

course prediction. This is expected and is a part of

normal FCW activation and functionality.

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such

misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events

within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW

will be deactivated until the next key cycle.

• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If

the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should

be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the

surroundings.

FCW Message

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to

avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect

every type of potential collision. The driver has the

responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the

vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow

this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF

NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows

the system to warn you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you.

The forward collision button is located on the switch

panel below the Uconnect display.

To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision

button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).

Forward Collision Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward

collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns

off).

• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system

from warning you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you.

• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns

the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near

warns the driver later.

• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents

the system from providing limited active braking, or

additional brake support if the driver is not braking

adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,

but maintains the audible and visual warnings.

NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from

one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it

will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.

Changing FCW And Active Braking Status

The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are

programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the

Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system

to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in

front of you when you are farther away and it applies

limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to

avoid a possible collision.

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows

the system to warn you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This

setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,

which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The system will retain the last setting selected by the

driver after ignition shut down.

• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as

overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the

path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,

oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or

higher rate of speed.

• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable

screens.

FCW Limited Warning

If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Function-

ality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that

limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still

drivable under normal conditions, the active braking

may not be fully available. Once the condition that

limited the system performance is no longer present, the

system will return to its full performance state. If the

problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although

the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have

the system checked by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

LaneSense Operation

The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above

37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The

LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to

detect lane markings and measure vehicle position

within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver

unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal

applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-

ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to

prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the

lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning

through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver

to remain within the lane boundaries.

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by

applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected and the

driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no

turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a

visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the

driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane

marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be

provided.

NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the

LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are

on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning

to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on

the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver

does not return their hands to the wheel.

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF

The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel

below the Uconnect display.

To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense

button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is

shown in the Driver Information Display (DID).

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense

button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).

LaneSense Warning Button

Lane Sense On Message

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system

state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the

ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

LaneSense Warning Message

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift

condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).

7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If

Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray

when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected

and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense

indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-

ing has been detected and the system is ready to

provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional

lane departure occurs.

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin

line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator

changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure when only the right

lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn

from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane

markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator

is solid green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual

warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-

curs.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-

tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid

yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid

green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to

the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane

boundary.

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow

Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator

changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this

time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the

opposite direction of the lane boundary.

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

Changing LaneSense Status

The LaneSense system settings can be configured

through the Uconnect system screen.

Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:

1. Push the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on

the bottom of the Uconnect display.

2. Push the “Settings” button.

3. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.

When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can

configure the intensity of the torque warning and the

warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-

alization settings.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph

(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).

• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.

• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel

whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,

traction control system, electronic stability control,

forward collision warning, etc.)

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual

and audible indications of the distance between the rear

fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.

during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System

Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and

recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever/gear

selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this

shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain

active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-

mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE

and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will

appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating

the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become

active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds

less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the

EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the

distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-

tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for

further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

ParkSense Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will

display the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the

display will show a single solid arc in the center rear

region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will

show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the

sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS

Rear

Distance

(in/cm)

Greater

than

79 in

(200 cm)

79-59 in

(200-150 cm)

59-47 in

(150-120

cm)

47-39 in

(120-100

cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in

(30 cm)

Arcs —

Left

None None None None None 2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flashing

Arcs —

Center

None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-

ing

2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flashing

Arcs —

Right

None None None None None 2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flashing

Audible

Alert

Chime

None Single 1/2-

Second Tone

(for rear

center only)

Slow

(for rear

center

only)

Slow

(for rear

center

only)

Fast

(for rear

center

only)

Fast Continuous

Radio

Volume

Reduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if

on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the

Uconnect display.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the

system, the instrument cluster will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-

onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for

further information. When the shift lever is moved to

REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will

display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as

the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is

disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED

will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense

switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense

switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED

will be ON.

ParkSense Switch

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park

Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the

instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per

ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further

information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved

to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted

condition, the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or

⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under

this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-

SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make

sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear

fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt

or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the

message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,

dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating

properly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster

will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it

on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID

will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long

as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the

radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not

to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be

covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an

obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide

a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/

bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system

OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,

etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear

fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the

system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor

problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the

EVIC/DID.

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the

driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

ParkSense.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check

for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,

and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-

sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to

your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and

audible indications of the distance between the rear

and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.

If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-

sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-

ver if the system detects a possible collision with an

obstacle.

NOTE:

• The driver can override the automatic braking func-

tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off

via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the

automatic brakes are being applied.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not

available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a

faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park

Assist system or the Braking System Module.

• The automatic braking function may only be applied if

the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-

ing with a detected obstacle.

• The automatic braking function may not be applied

fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of

the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.

• The automatic braking function can be enabled/

disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features

section of the Uconnect System.

• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state

for the automatic braking function through ignition

cycles.

The automatic braking function is intended to assist the

driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-

stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the

vehicle.

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to

substitute the driver.

• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s

acceleration and braking and is responsible for the

vehicle’s movements.

Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-

tions of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in

REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of

these shift lever positions, the system will remain active

until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately

7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above

the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in

the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.

The system will become active again if the vehicle speed

is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph

(9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense

Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in

the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active

Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/

bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in

(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings

to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper

and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further infor-

mation.

ParkSense Display

Rear Park Assist

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will

display the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the

display will show a single solid arc in the center rear

region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will

show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the

sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

WARNING ALERTS

Rear

Distance

(in/cm)

Greater

than

79 in

(200 cm)

79-59 in

(200-150

cm)

59-47 in

(150-120

cm)

47-39 in

(120-100

cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in

(30 cm)

Arcs —

Left

None None None None None 2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flashing

Arcs —

Center

None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-

ing

2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flashing

Arcs —

Right

None None None None None 2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flashing

Audible

Alert

Chime

None Single

1/2-

Second

Tone

(for rear

center only)

Slow

(for rear

center only)

Slow

(for rear

center only)

Fast

(for rear

center only)

Fast Continuous

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS

Rear

Distance

(in/cm)

Greater

than

79 in

(200 cm)

79-59 in

(200-150

cm)

59-47 in

(150-120

cm)

47-39 in

(120-100

cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in

(30 cm)

Radio

Volume

Reduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if

on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Front Park Assist

When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning

screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the

display will show a single arc in the center front region.

As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display

will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A

fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd

flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone

when the 1st flashing arc appears.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right front region and will produce a fast

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

No Tone/Solid Arc

No Tone/Flashing Arc

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

WARNING ALERTS

Front Distance

(in/cm)

Greater than

47 in (120 cm)

47-39 in

(120-100 cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in (30 cm)

Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible Alert

Chime

None None None Fast Continuous

Radio Volume

Reduced

No No No Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if

on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert

(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-

stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and

brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected

from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the

Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume

settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.

The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and

HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state

through ignition cycles.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the

Uconnect display.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the

system, the instrument cluster will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-

onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for

further information. When the shift lever is moved to

ParkSense Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will

display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as

the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is

disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED

will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense

switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense

switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED

will be ON.

Service The ParkSense Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has

detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will

actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will

display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR

SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.

When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse

and the system has detected a faulted condition, the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or

⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙

pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car

graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at ei-

ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where

the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide

arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These

arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UN-

AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object

is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The

car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or ⬙ Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” for further information.

If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙

or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-

SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make

sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear

fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and

clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then

cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see

an authorized dealer.

If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-

QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an

authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,

ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system

operating properly.

• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-

tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster

will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it

on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument

cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as

the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the

radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not

to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be

covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an

obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it

could provide a false indication that an obstacle is

behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system

off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.

are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system

misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,

causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE

REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the

object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking

application to be delayed.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

(Continued)

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the

driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

ParkSense.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind

your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check

for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,

and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-

sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to

your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to

assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-

ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,

providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling

the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist

system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver

maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and

brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver

selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is

capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a

perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver

side or passenger side).

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the

vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and

must intervene as required.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to

substitute the driver.

• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver

touches the steering wheel after being instructed to

remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-

tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to

manually complete the parking maneuver.

• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.

environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,

etc., or if searching for a parking space that has

surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).

• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30

miles accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park

Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-

rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle

calibration to improve the performance of the feature.

The system will also continuously perform the dy-

namic vehicle calibration to account for differences

such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.

Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active

Park Assist System

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled

and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist

switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect

display.

ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the

ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).

To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push

the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns

off).

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off

automatically for any of the following conditions:

• The parking maneuver is completed.

• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when

searching for a parking space.

• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during

active steering guidance into the parking space.

• Touching the steering wheel during active steering

guidance into the parking space.

• pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist

switch.

• The Driver’s door is opened.

• The trunk is opened.

• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System

intervention.

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a

maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.

If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,

the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct

the driver to complete the maneuver manually.

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-

ate and search for a parking space when the following

conditions are present:

• The gear position is in DRIVE.

• The ignition is in the RUN position.

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

• The Driver’s door is closed.

• The trunk is closed.

• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately

15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver

to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-

mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The

driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the

ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.

• The outer surface and the underside of the front and

rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,

mud, dirt or other obstruction.

When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park

Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED

will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not

present.

Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/

Display

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled

the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpen-

dicular Park” message will appear in the Driver Informa-

tion Display (DID). You may switch to perpendicular

parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side

steering wheel switch to change your parking space

setting.

NOTE:

• When searching for a parking space, use the turn

signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you

want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense

Active Park Assist system will automatically search for

a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle

if the turn signal is not activated.

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected

parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear

of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).

• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected

parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/

clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-

ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.

from surrounding objects/vehicles).

• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should

drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the

type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.

• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking

space (example: if passing multiple available parking

spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected

parking space for the maneuver).

When an available parking space has been found, and the

vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move

forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking

sequence.

Active ParkSense Searching

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to

stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands

from the steering wheel.

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands

removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed

to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From

Wheel

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

NOTE:

• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and

accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-

ver.

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their

hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check

their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a

maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If

the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,

the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the

driver to complete the maneuver manually.

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle

speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering

guidance into the parking space. The system will

provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that

tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible

for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.

• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any

reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE

position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move forward.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-

VERSE position.

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When

the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to

check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is

satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to

PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking

Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance

Operation/Display

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is en-

abled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for

Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID

display. Push the OK button on the left side steering

wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a

perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral-

lel parking if you desire.

Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking

maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK

for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.

Active ParkSense Searching Display

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• When searching for a parking space, use the turn

signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you

want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense

Active Park Assist system will automatically search for

a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle

if the turn signal is not activated.

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected

parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear

of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).

• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected

parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/

clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-

ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.

from surrounding objects/vehicles).

• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should

drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the

type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.

• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking

space (example: if passing multiple available parking

spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected

parking space for the maneuver).

When an available parking space has been found, and the

vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move

forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular

parking sequence.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to

stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands

from the steering wheel.

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands

removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed

to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From

Wheel

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

NOTE:

• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and

accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-

ver.

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their

hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check

their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a

maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If

the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,

the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the

driver to complete the maneuver manually.

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle

speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering

guidance into the parking space. The system will

provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that

tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible

for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.

• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any

reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.

Check Surroundings — Move Backwards

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE

position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move forward.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-

VERSE position.

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.

When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-

structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the

driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should

shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check

Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.

CAUTION!

•

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a

parking aid and it is unable to recognize every

obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs

(Continued)

Check Surroundings — Move Backwards Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

CAUTION! (Continued)

might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.

Obstacles located above or below the sensors will

not be detected when they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the

ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be

able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It

is recommended that the driver looks over his/her

shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park

Assist system.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or

perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using

the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always

check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check

for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,

and blind spots before backing up and moving

forward. You are responsible for safety and must

continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-

ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back

Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the

rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is

put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the

touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check

entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five

seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is

located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-

grammable modes of operation that may be selected

through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be

displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition

is switched to the OFF position.

A touch screen button to disable display of the camera

image is made available when the vehicle is not in

REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shift-

ing out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen

button personalization entry in the camera settings

menu.

ParkView Camera Location

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its

projected backup path based on the steering wheel

position.

When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of

the vehicle.

The following table shows the approximate distances for

each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)

Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with

water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be

used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is

unable to view every obstacle or object in your

drive path.

(Continued)

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/her

shoulder when using ParkView.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to

check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your surroundings and

must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights

and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power

sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.

Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

Front Map/Reading Lights

The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-

head console.

Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons

There are two map/reading light buttons located in the

center of the overhead console that allow the lights to

operate independently.

Push the button once to turn the light on.

To turn the light off, push the button a second time.

Overhead Console — Power Sunroof

Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses

The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-

dently by pushing the lenses.

Push the lens once to turn the light on.

To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.

NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.

The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on

the RKE is pushed.

Sunglass Bin Door

The overhead console has a compartment which provides

storage for a pair of sunglasses.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or

front mounted sunglass bin door.

The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de-

sign. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to

open. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to

close.

Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-

held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security

systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s

battery.

Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sun visor

designate the three different HomeLink channels.

The HomeLink indicator is located above the center

button.

NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security

Alarm is active.

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are training the universal transceiver. Do

not train the transceiver if people, pets or other

objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener that has

a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal

safety standards. This includes most garage door

opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use

a garage door opener without these safety features.

Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-

sistance.

(Continued)

HomeLink Indicator And Buttons

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

WARNING! (Continued)

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can

cause serious injury or death.

NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required

by federal safety standards. This includes most garage

door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use

a garage door opener without these safety features. Call

toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage

before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that

a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of

the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink

system.

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN

position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink

buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red

indicator flashes.

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when

programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not

erase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manu-

factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be

identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located

where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door

opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to

open and close the door. The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand-held

transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-

cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly

and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the

frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-

lease both buttons after the indicator light changes

from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),

locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-

ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices

there may be a light that blinks when the garage door

opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two

seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device

activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to

complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat

each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining

steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured

before 1995.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand-held

transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-

cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly

and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the

frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-

lease both buttons after the indicator light changes

from slow to rapid.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-

ming is complete and the garage door/device should

activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Non-Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all

remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States

that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after

several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-

mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to

time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

door or gate motor.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,

while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when

fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash

rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take

up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage

door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-

ming is complete and the garage door/device should

activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for

programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Canadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and

follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink

button. Activation will now occur for the programmed

device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security

system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The

hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at

any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

in your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20

seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all

channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be

erased.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here

are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-

held transmitter.

• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener

to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas

can cause serious injury or death.

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are programming the universal trans-

ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,

pets or other objects are in the path of the door or

gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This includes

most garage door opener models manufactured

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without

these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515

or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

information or assistance.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate the

device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-

fications were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun

visors on the overhead console.

Sunroof Switch

1 — Opening Sunroof

2 — Venting Sunroof

3 — Closing Sunroof

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the

Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location

accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of

a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the

ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could

also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-

gers are also properly secured.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any

object, to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half

second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-

cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will

open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express

Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-

tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward

to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a

partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is

pushed again.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will close automatically from any

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-

cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express

Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will

stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result

in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and

the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one half second

and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is

called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of

sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any

other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is

open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to

approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is

turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door

will cancel this feature.

NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF

EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switches are located to the left

between the sun visors on the overhead console.

The power shade switches are located to the right be-

tween the sun visors on the overhead console.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the

Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location

(Continued)

Power Sunroof Switches

Power Shade Switches

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of

a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the

ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could

also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-

gers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any

object, to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the sunroof switch rearward and release it within

one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to

the full open position and automatically stop. (If the

sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is

initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half

open position prior to the sunroof opening). This is called

“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any

movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.

The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position

when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automati-

cally open to the half open position prior to the sunroof

opening) open to the full open position and automatically

stop. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The

sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened

condition until the switch is pushed and held again.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will close automatically from any

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-

cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express

Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will

stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half sec-

ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This

is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of

sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the

vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically

cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof

opening to the Vent position.

Opening Power Shade — Express

Push the shade switch rearward and release it within

one-half second and the shade will automatically open to

the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the

switch a second time from the halfway position and the

shade will automatically open to the full open position

and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.

During Express Open operation, any movement of the

shade switch will stop the shade.

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode

To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.

The shade will open and stop automatically at the

half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch

rearward again and the shade will open automatically to

the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop

the movement and the shade will remain in a partially

opened condition until the switch is pushed again.

Closing Power Shade — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the shade will close automatically from any

position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade

will close fully and stop automatically. This is called

“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the shade.

NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the

half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again

will automatically close both the sunroof and shade

completely.

Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode

To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed

condition until the switch is pushed again.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and

release to Express Close.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result

in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be

a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, then open the front and rear

windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the

buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-

roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any

window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to

approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is

turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door

will cancel this feature.

NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power

outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small

electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.

The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a

“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.

Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when

the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while

the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly

to the battery and powered at all times.

NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” pow-

ered outlets should be removed or turned off when the

vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against

discharge.

The front power outlet is located next to the storage area

on the center stack of the instrument panel.

In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power

outlet located in the storage area of the center console.

Front Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob

and element must be used.

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13

Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power

rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system

will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the power

outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the

fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause

damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

(Continued)

Front Center Console Outlet

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-

sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the

power outlet can cause damage.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the

forward wall of the center console storage bin, below the

media center. This outlet can power cellular phones,

electronics and other low power devices requiring power

up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles

will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once

the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the

inverter should automatically reset.

To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.

The outlet automatically turns off when the device is

unplugged.

NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power

inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.

Power Inverter Outlet

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders

The cupholders are located in the center console forward

of the armrest between the front seats.

Front Seat Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

Rear Seat Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest

between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned

forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide

convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while

maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-

bows.

Rear Seat Cupholders

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side

of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to

open the glove compartment.

NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with

a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the

emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key

into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn

the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the

reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.

Glove Compartment Release Handle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299

Console Features

There is a storage compartment located under the center

console armrest.

Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of

the armrest, to open the storage compartment.

The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow

driver/passenger comfort position.

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-

ment lid in the open position. Driving with the

console compartment lid open may result in injury in

a collision.

There is a front center console storage area located under

the center console cupholder.

• To access the front center console storage area push the

release button and pull rearward.

NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in

any position to maintain access to the storage area.

Center Console Armrest Storage

300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Located inside the center console storage compartment is

a line that indicates how much storage is allowed.

Center Console Cupholder Release Front Center Console Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301

NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line

may impede the sliding of the cupholder.

Located inside the front of the console storage area power

cords can be routed from the storage area to the center

console pass-through.

Storage Compartment Fill Line Center Console Storage Passage

302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Door Storage

The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle

holder.

Front Center Console Pass-Through

Front Door Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303

Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped

For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the

armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage

compartment.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If

Equipped

The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying

versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the

seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.

When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-

ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.

NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away

when not in use.

Rear Armrest Storage

304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make

sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the

seatback above the seat strap.

Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-

bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-

erly latched seat could cause serious injury.

• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the

rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down

position) should not be used as a play area by

children when the vehicle is in motion. They could

be seriously injured in a collision. Children should

be seated and using the proper restraint system.

• To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear

cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes

only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats

and use seat belts.

WARNING!

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can

change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle

handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-

sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your

vehicle:

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-

sible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of

the vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

collision.

306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Grocery Bag Hooks

The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,

located on either side of the rear cargo area.

CAUTION!

Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs

(16 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to

hook and mounting surface.

Grocery Bag Hooks

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307

Ski Pass-Through

There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear

seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,

to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and

pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through

door.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on

the climate control. Push this button to turn on the

rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if

equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate

when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window

defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15

minutes. For an additional 5 minutes of operation, push

the button a second time.

Ski Pass-Through

308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........314

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........315

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......318

䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......320

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............321

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............333

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............346

▫ White Telltale Indicator Light .............348

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light ..............351

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) ..............................352

▫ Oil Change Reset .....................354

▫ Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And

(DID) .............................355

▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............357

▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........363

䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....364

▫ Oil Change Reset .....................366

▫ Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And

(DID) .............................367

▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............370

▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........374

䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................376

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................377

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............378

▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal

Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN

Settings.............................378

䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ......394

䡵 USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED . .394

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................395

▫ Radio Operation ......................396

▫ Media Mode .........................396

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .396

▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........396

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................398

▫ Manual Climate Controls ................398

▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —

If Equipped .........................403

▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —

If Equipped..........................408

▫ Climate Control Functions ...............414

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......416

▫ Operating Tips .......................418

䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR .............421

䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

TIPS ................................421

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Introducing Uconnect...................421

▫ Get Started ..........................423

▫ Basic Voice Commands..................424

▫ Radio ..............................425

▫ Media..............................427

▫ Phone..............................428

▫ Voice Text Reply ......................430

▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................431

▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................432

▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ............433

▫ Vehicle Health Alert ...................434

▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................434

▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............435

▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............436

▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) .....................438

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN).........439

▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............440

▫ Do Not Disturb ......................440

▫ General Information ...................441

▫ Additional Information .................442

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio Screen 11 — Steering Wheel

2 — EVIC/DID Controls 7 — Passenger Air Bag 12 — Hood Release

3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Headlight Switch

4 — Cruise Controls 9 — Radio Controls

5 — Ignition Switch 10 — Climate Controls

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

Base Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Instrument Cluster

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

3. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

The fuel pump symbol points

to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-

tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the

upper limits of the normal operating range.

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

Premium Driver Information Display (DID) Instrument Cluster

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. Driver Information Display (DID)

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-

sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

3. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

The fuel pump symbol points

to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-

tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the

upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on

in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-

sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These

indications are indicative and precautionary and as such

must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative

to the information contained in the Owner Manual,

which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the

event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The

system check menu may appear different based upon

equipment options and current vehicle status. Some

telltales are optional and may not appear.

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a

chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains un-

buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will

sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

Air Bag Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has

been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer

to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

United States

Canada

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-

voir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at

the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system

malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may

be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Vehicle Security Warning Light

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too

high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,

turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature

reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to

“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster, this indicator will display in the DID. Refer to

”Driver Information Display (DID) — If Equipped” for further information.

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Charging System Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Charging System Warning Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes

on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase

engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is

experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an

authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-

gencies.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-

hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-

pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and

completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn

off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;

however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and

you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your

vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/

RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,

have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with

severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them vehicle. Then, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-

nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in

contact with hot engine or exhaust components and

cause a fire.

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning

This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-

fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Oil Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

Door Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.

If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.

Trunk Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Trunk Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The

light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked

promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate

the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-

eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not

require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to

immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-

viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine

control system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result

in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or

others.

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-

hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),

see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each

time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was

turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused

the ESC activation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to

refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly com-

plying with the indications that you find there.

IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair

immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be

checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

Electronic Park Brake Fail Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly

and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.

Low Fuel Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Fuel Indicator Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain

on until fuel is added.

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the

brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the

benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light

This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the

driver to take action in order to avoid the collision. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when

the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator

changes from solid green to solid yellow.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing

yellow.

Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further

information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

LaneSense Failure Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.

Please see your authorized dealer.

Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Service AWD Indicator Light

This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning

properly and that service is required. Contact you authorized dealership.

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-

gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.

Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further informa-

tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-

hicle.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Tell-

tale Light

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se-

lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-

function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

NOTE:

•

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either

turn signal on.

•

Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed

Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

White Telltale Indicator Light

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Cruise Control Cancelled Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Cruise Control Cancelled Light

This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to

“Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further in-

formation.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has

been turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has

reached the speed desired and the set button has been selected. For further information, re-

fer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light

This will display the distance setting for the ACC system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light

What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control

lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to

switch the headlights back to low beam.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

display is located in the instrument cluster.

The EVIC Main Menu items consists of the following:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)

• Audio Info

• Messages

• Screen Setup

• Settings

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the Main Menu items ( Speed-

ometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy, Trip A,

Trip B, Audio, Messages, Screen Set Up,

Settings).

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the Main Menu

items (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel

Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Messages,

Screen Set Up, Settings).

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the information screens or submenu

screens of a main menu item.

EVIC Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to

access the information screens or submenu

screens of a main menu item.

• OK Button

Push the OK button to access/select the information

screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push

and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset

displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Oil Change Reset

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will

display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime

has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change

interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty

cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval

may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving

style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To

turn off the message temporarily, push and release the

OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after

performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the

following procedure.

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the

OFF/LOCK position.

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life

Screen In The DID And Holding OK

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll

downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access

the “Oil Life” screen.

4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life.

5. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the

screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And

(DID)

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Service Airbag System

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to

XX”

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Key in Ignition

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Key to Run

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Gear Not Available

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Washer Fluid Low

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the

white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the

middle, and red telltales on the left.

EVIC Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the

desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC.

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push

and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle

between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to

select your speedometer display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

Vehicle Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the

Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push and

release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be

displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll

through the information sub-menus and push the OK

button to select or reset the following resettable sub-menus:

Tire Pressure

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push

and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the

following will be displayed:

If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is

displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the

ICON.

If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To

XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire

pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the

pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different

color than the other tire pressure value.

If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire

Pressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be

reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return

to the main menu.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

under “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Coolant Temperature

Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission

Only

Oil Temperature

Oil Life

Battery Voltage

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.

• Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-

played and one without the Current Value displayed:

– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)

– Range To Empty (miles or km)

– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)

– The Max and Min values will correspond to the

particular engine requirements

• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber

color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.

• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.

Trip Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left

or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information

will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This

feature shows the number of stored warning messages.

Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see

what the stored messages are.

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push

and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The

Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-

tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the

location that information is displayed.

Vehicle Settings (EVIC) — If Equipped

Settings Translation Message Submenu

1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French

2 Units Select Units U.S., Metric

3 FCW Sensitivity FCW Sensitivity Near, Far

4 ParkSense ParkSense Off, Sound Only, Sound & Display

5 Blind Spot Alert Blind Spot Alert Off, Lights Only, Lights & Chime

6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Asst On, Off

7 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On, Off

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Settings Translation Message Submenu

8 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On, Off

9 Passive Entry Passive Entry On, Off

10 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door, All Doors

11 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On, Off

12 Remote Start Comfort

System

Rmt Start Comfort Off, Remote Starts Only, All Starts

13 Sound Horn with Remote

Start

Horn w/ Rmt Start On, Off

14 Sound Horn with Remote

Lock

Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off, 1st Press, 2nd Press

15 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On, Off

16 Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On, Off

17 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On, Off

18 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On, Off

19 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On, Off

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

Settings Translation Message Submenu

20 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds,

90 seconds

21 Key-Off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off, 45 seconds, 5 minutes, 10

minutes

22 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds,

90 seconds

23 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On, Off

24 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On, Off

25 Compass variance Compass Var See Owner’s Manual, X Increment

26 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Push > to calibrate the compass

27 Brake Service Brake Service Follow the VF specifically for this

one

28 Auto Park Brake Auto Park Brake On, Off

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

1. Upper Left

• None

• Compass (default)

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)

• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)

2. Upper Right

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp (default)

• Time

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)

• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)

NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy

L/100km (or MPG) UR, Range UL if the proxies for

Compass and Outside Temp are not available

3. Center

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range To Empty

• Average Economy

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

• Current Economy

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Audio Information

• Menu Title (default)

• Digital Speedo

4. Current Gear

• On

• Off (default)

5. Defaults (defaults: Compass UR, Outside Temp UL,

Center Menu Title, Gear Display Off)

• Restore

• Cancel

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-

interactive display that is located in the instrument

cluster.

Driver Information Display (DID)

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The DID Main Menu items consists of the following:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Driver Assist

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)

• Audio Info

• Messages

• Screen Setup

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the main menu and sub-

menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver As-

sist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Audio, Messages,

Screen Setup).

DID Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu and

submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver

Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Audio, Mes-

sages, Screen Setup).

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the information screens or sub-menu

screens of a main menu item.

• LEFT Arrow Button

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to

access the information screens or sub-menu

screens of a main menu item.

• OK Button

Push the OK button to access/select the information

screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push

and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset

displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Oil Change Reset

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-

cator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will display

in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime has

sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.

The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,

which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,

dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To

turn off the message temporarily, push and release the

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after

performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the

following procedure.

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the

OFF/LOCK position.

Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life

Screen In The DID And Holding OK

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll

downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access

the “Oil Life” screen.

4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life.

5. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the

screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And

(DID)

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

• Service Airbag System

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to

XX”

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Key in Ignition

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Key to Run

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Gear Not Available

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Washer Fluid Low

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the

white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the

middle, and red telltales on the left.

DID Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until

the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is highlighted in

the DID.

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push

and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle

between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to

select your speedometer display.

Vehicle Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID.

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant

Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow

button to scroll through the information sub-menus and

push the OK button to select or reset the following

resettable sub-menus:

Tire Pressure

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push

and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the

following will be displayed:

If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is

displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the

ICON.

If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To

XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire

pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the

pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different

color than the other tire pressure value.

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire

Pressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be

reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return

to the main menu.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

under “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Coolant Temperature

Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission

Only

Oil Temperature

Oil Life

Battery Voltage

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If

Equipped

The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The

information displayed depends on ACC system status.

Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of

the following displays in the DID:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-

tive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has

not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering

wheel) and the following will display in the DID:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the

instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC

activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The DID will return to the last display selected after

five seconds of no ACC display activity.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle.”

LaneSense Menu — If Equipped

The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.

The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-

tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For

further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”

in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.

• Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-

played and one without the Current Value displayed:

– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)

– Range To Empty (miles or km)

– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

– The Max and Min values will correspond to the

particular engine requirements

• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber

color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.

• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.

Trip Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left

or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information

will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This

feature shows the number of stored warning messages.

Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see

what the stored messages are.

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push

and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The

Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-

tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the

location that information is displayed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

1. Upper Left

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp. (Default)

• Time

• Range

• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)

• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)

2. Upper Right

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp (Default)

• Time

• Range

• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)

• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)

NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy

L/100km (or MPG) UR, Range UL if the proxies for

Compass and Outside Temp are not available

3. Center

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range

• Average L/100km (or MPG)

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Current L/100km (or MPG)

• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

• Audio Information

• Menu Title (Default )

• Digital Speedo

4. Current Gear

• On

• Off (default)

5. Odometer

• On (Default)

• Off

6. Fuel Gauge

• Standard (Default)

• Range

7. Defaults

• Restore

• Cancel

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on

the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on

the center of the instrument panel that allows you to

access and change the customer programmable features.

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On

Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons are located below the Uconnect system in the

center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a

Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the

Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.

Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and

change settings (i.e. 30, 60, 90) push the center of the

control knob one or more times to select or change a

setting (i.e. ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and

Back buttons located below the system.

Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect

screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn

the screen on.

Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain

option on the Uconnect system.

Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On

Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect display.

Customer Programmable Features/Personal

Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN Settings

Uconnect 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate

exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on

the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙ button on the touch-

screen. The remaining settings are defined for the Uconnect

8.4A/8.4AN — Press the “Apps” button on the touch-

screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen

to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the

Uconnect system allows you to access programmable fea-

tures that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock,

Safety & Driving Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors &

Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Op-

tions, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore

Settings, Clear Personal Data (if equipped).

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the

desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,

press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has

been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back

button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or

press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of

the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow

buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to

toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available:

• Display Mode

This feature allows you to select one of the auto display

settings. To change Mode status, press and release the

Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.

• Display Brightness With Headlights On

This feature allows you to select the display brightness

when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with

the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen.

• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off

This feature allows you to select the display brightness

when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with

the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen.

• Set Language

This feature allows you to select one of the languages for

all display nomenclature, including the trip functions

and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set

Language” button on the touchscreen and then press the

desired language button on the touchscreen until a

check-mark appears next to the language, showing that

setting has been selected.

• Units

This feature allows you to select US or Metric units of

measure in the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation

system (if equipped). Press “US” or “Metric” until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected.

• Touchscreen Beep

This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound

heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

“Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected.

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions

will appear in the driver screen/EVIC/DID/Cluster dis-

play as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within

a programmed route. To turn on or enable, press the

“Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the

setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Voice

This feature allows you to change the Voice Response

Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,

press the “Brief” (Brief is a shortened response for

advanced users) or “Detailed” (Detailed provides more

comprehensive responses for new users) button on the

touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the

setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Clock

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Sync Time With GPS

This feature allows you to automatically have the radio

set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the

“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected.

• Set Time Hours

This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync

with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be

unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or

down.

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Set Time Minutes

This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync

with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be

unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or

down.

• Time Format

This feature allows you to select the time format display

setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touch-

screen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or

24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the

Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press

the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen

until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing

that setting has been selected.

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on

the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity — If

Equipped

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can

be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is

the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a

possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when

you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction

time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving

experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a

possible collision when you are much closer to the

vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press

and release the “Near” or “Far” button.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —

If Equipped

The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).

When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to

slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The

ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver

requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential

frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph

(8 km/h) and is only enabled when FCW is on.

For further information, refer to “Forward Collision

Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which

the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane

departures. The LaneSense Warning can be set to provide

either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning zone start

point.

For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-

ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the

steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.

The amount of directional torque the steering system can

apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane

departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”

For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-

ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

• ParkSense — If Equipped

The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the

vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE

and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The

system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-

lease the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound and Display.”

Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-

mation.

• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped

Front ParkSense volume settings can be selected from the

EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime

volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and

“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped

Rear ParkSense volume settings can be selected from the

EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime

volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and

“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will

detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize

autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-

abled when ParkSense is also on).

Refer to “ParkSense Rear Braking Assist” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system func-

tion and operating information.

• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirrors

will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN

position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE

position. The mirrors will move back to their previous

position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

To enable or turn on, press the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next

to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature

can be set to Off, Lights Only or Lights and Chime. The

Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights category.

When this category is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor

(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert

in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime category is

activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual

alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when

the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot

Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind

Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights &

Chime” button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in

the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is

not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor

alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result

in the BSM not operating to specification.

• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If

Equipped

When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines

are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to

illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back

up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed

center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to

assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines — If

Equipped

When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are

overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate

the width of the vehicle.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView

Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for

up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

on the windshield and the wipers are set to an intermit-

tent position. To make your selection, press the “Rain

Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Electric Park Brake Service Mode — If Equipped

This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle

owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-

tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to

service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,

rotors, etc.).

For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake

(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”

• Auto Park Brake

Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle

is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission)

• Hill Start Assist

This setting will hold the brake if the driver is on a hill

and takes their foot off the brake to accelerate.

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Headlights Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay

setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90

seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating

that the setting has been selected.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate

and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors

are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,

press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your

desired time interval.

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make

your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-

ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next

to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-

ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High

Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has

been selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Un-

derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further

information.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on

whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,

press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-

screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-

cating that the setting has been selected.

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the

passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with

or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To

make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, indicating that the setting has been

selected.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Auto Door Locks

The Auto Door Lock feature can be enabled, or disabled,

by your authorized dealer. Please visit your local autho-

rized dealer for further information.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock

On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the

passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with

or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To

make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, indicating that the setting has been

selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

• Sound Horn With Remote

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the door locks are activated via the key fob. To make your

selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd

Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the remote start is activated. To make your selection,

press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,

showing that setting has been selected. Select one of three

options to sound the horn, Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first

press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.

When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter

which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-

grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the

driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press

Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,

touching the handle more than once will only result in

the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,

once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/

unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use

RKE transmitter).

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Passive Entry — If Equipped

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles

door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make

your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,

showing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless

Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle”.

• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If

Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory

Linked To FOB” button on the touchscreen, until a

check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting

has been selected.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set

to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory

Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”

for further information.

Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the

touchscreen, one of the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat OR Auto-On Driver

Heated Seat & Steering wheel OR Auto-On Driver

Heated/Vented Seat OR Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented

Seat & Steering Wheel

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated/vented

seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on

when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented

seat will turn on. To make your selection, press “Off,”

“Remote Start Only,” OR “All Starts” checkbox until a

check-mark appears next to the setting option. Select

“Off,” “Remote Start Only” OR “All Starts” to determine

when the feature is activated.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Easy Exit Seat

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit

Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “0 seconds,”

“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the

touchscreen.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay

setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the

touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90

seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating

that the setting has been selected.

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade

settings. Press and drag the ’C’ icon, use the arrows to

adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.

• Equalizer

This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble

settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your

finger up or down to change the setting as well as press

directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.

• AUX Volume Match

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match

button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

• Paired Audio Sources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

SiriusXM Setup

After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available.

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to, or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen in order to re-

subscribe.

Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to

access the Subscription Information screen.

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking

⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”

select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings

are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to

default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data

including Bluetooth devices and presets. To Clear Per-

sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the

touchscreen. A check mark will appear in the box when

selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,

refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.

USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED

Located in the front storage area of the center console,

this feature allows an external device, to be connected to

the audio system.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s

Manual.

USB Port and AUX Jack

1 — USB Port

2 — AUX Jack

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and

mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker

switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom

of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch

between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/

SXM/AUX, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which audio mode you

are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation

while in mode.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch

will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-

grammed in the radio preset button.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth).

Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the

beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the

previous track if it is within eight seconds after the

current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the

second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES

Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is

not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does

not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during mobile device operation when

not using Uconnect (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio

is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a

manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human

body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines

found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-

mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific

community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless

radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy

emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-

ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,

the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some

situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If

you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask

for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician

for help.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to

make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system

can be operated through either the controls on the instru-

ment panel or through the Uconnect system display.

When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,

Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger

temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the

display.

Manual Climate Controls

The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning

system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary

dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can

be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Front Blower Control

There are seven blower speeds. Use

this control to regulate the amount of

air forced through the system in any

mode you select. The blower speed

increases as you move the control

clockwise from the OFF position.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the tem-

perature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Rotating the knob coun-

terclockwise, from top center into the

blue area of the scale, indicates cooler

temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-

wise, into the red area, indicates

warmer temperatures.

Manual Climate Controls

1 — RECIRCULATION Control 5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)

2 — Front Blower Control 6 — REAR DEFROST Mode

3 — MAX Air Conditioning

(A/C)

7 — MODE Control

4 — Temperature Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

Air Conditioning Operation

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning

(A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is

operating.

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the

A/C is turned on automatically and the air is recircu-

lated. A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C

position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C

button is pushed.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower

than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser

(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of

dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from

behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric

front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the con-

denser, reducing air conditioning performance.

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Mode control allows you to choose

from several patterns of air distribu-

tion. You can select either a primary

mode, as identified by the symbols, or

a blend of two of these modes. The

closer the control is to a particular

mode, the more air distribution you

receive from that mode.

Panel Mode

Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-

ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct

airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center

instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear

seat passengers.

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Bi-Level Mode

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any

conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the

upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved

comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor Mode

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount through the defrost and side win-

dow demist outlets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side

window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the

windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,

while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost Mode

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode

with maximum blower and warm temperature settings

for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX

and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C

button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help

dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these

modes only when necessary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

Recirculation Control

Push this button to choose between outside air intake or

recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will

illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use

the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any

outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior

rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid

weather.

NOTE:

• If the RECIRCULATION

button is pushed when

the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED

indicator will flash three times and then turn off to

indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation

mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because

of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum

defogging, select the outside air position.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-

ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C

button.

Economy Mode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to

turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.

Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-

perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or

Floor modes.

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If

Equipped

Buttons On Your Faceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the

Uconnect touchscreen.

Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect system screen.

Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On

Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-

nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function

again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into

manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-

nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again

will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode

and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-

nates when ON.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Manual Temperature Controls —

Buttons On The Touchscreen

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Front Defrost Button

Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode.

The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air

comes from the windshield and side window demist

outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower

level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum

temperature settings for best windshield and side window

defrosting and defogging. If the front defrost mode is

turned off the climate system will return the previous

setting.

5. Rear Defrost Button

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster

and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-

tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after

10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five

additional minutes will be added to the timer function.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

6. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced

through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds

available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode

to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected

using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or

buttons on the touchscreens as follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the control

clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower

speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob

counterclockwise.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar

area between the icons.

7. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are

as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There

is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to

shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these

outlets.

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and

floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-

ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount

of air is directed through the defrost and side

window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window

demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or

snowy conditions.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX

and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not

pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-

shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only

when necessary.

8. Climate Control OFF Button

Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect 8.4)

Provides temperature control. Press the button on the

faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-

screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen

temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the

touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407

10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)

Provides temperature control. Press the button on the

faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the

touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch-

screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on

the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.

11. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to

regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red

area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-

perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-

tures.

Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —

If Equipped

Buttons On Your Faceplate

Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen

The buttons on your faceplate are also accessible on the

Uconnect system touchscreen.

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On

Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-

nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function

Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into

manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-

nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again

will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode

and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-

nates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by

adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing

this function will cause the ATC to switch between

manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic

Operation” for more information.

5. Front Defrost Button

Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost

mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.

Air comes from the windshield and side window demist

outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower

level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum

temperature settings for best windshield and side win-

dow defrosting and defogging. Performing this function

will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the

front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will

return the previous setting.

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if

equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).

An indicator will illuminate when the rear window

defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after 10 minutes.

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar

towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for

warmer temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar

towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for

cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411

9. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the

Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated

when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize

the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-

perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature

setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced

through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds

available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode

to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected

using either the blower control knob on your faceplate or

the buttons on your touchscreen as follows:

Blower Control Knob On Your Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the knob clockwise

from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases

as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

Buttons On Your Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar

area between the icons.

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are

as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to

shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these

outlets.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and

floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-

ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount

of air is directed through the defrost and side

window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window

demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or

snowy conditions.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-

ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the

button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the

blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-

ture settings.

NOTE:

In Sync mode, this button will also automatically

adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413

14.

Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-

perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide

the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards

the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer

temperature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically

adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same

time.

15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to

regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red

area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-

perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-

tures.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator

to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning

system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,

cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into

the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C

button to turn off the air conditioning and manually

adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make

sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,

select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if

needed.

414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than

expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-

cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of

dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from

behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric

front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the

condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-

mance.

Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings.

The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX

A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be

adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings

will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the

selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation Control

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.

Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The

recirculation LED will illuminate the button on your

touchscreen and the button on your faceplate when either

button is selected. Push either button on your touch-

screen or button on your faceplate a second time to turn

off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air

into the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation

feature may be unavailable (recirculation button on

touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could

create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On

systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation

mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window

clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-

matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use

Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in

the control button to blink and then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on your faceplate or the button

on your touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the

system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-

senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once

the desired temperature is displayed, the system will

achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is

not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-

ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the

system to function automatically.

416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for

cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts

the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide

comfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric

units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable

feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this

section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic

mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain

on low until the engine warms up. The blower will

increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,

air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-

trol.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by

adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at

a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This

allows the front occupants to control the volume of air

circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow

by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C

operation and Recirculation control can also be manually

selected in Manual operation.

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently

from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,

temperature control will continue to operate automati-

cally.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for

suggested control settings for various weather condi-

tions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a

high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-

sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-

mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-

ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-

tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance

Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper

coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode

during Winter months is not recommended because it

may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air

conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in

fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility

of compressor damage when the system is started again.

418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in

mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost

on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear

the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase

the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation

mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may

occur.

NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-

tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce

or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.

When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves

collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause

odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the

water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake

is clear of ice, slush and snow.

A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters outside air containing

dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be

totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-

tions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PERSONALIZED MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar

are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow

these steps:

1. Press the “Apps

” button to open the App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace

an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/

shortcut on the main menu bar.

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-

ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and

tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or

8.4A/8.4AN system.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421

Key Features:

• 5” touchscreen

• Three buttons on either side of the display

If you see the

icon on your touchscreen, you have

the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a

Uconnect 8.4A system.

Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 8.4AN

422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your

voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-

structions.

Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversa-

tions are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while

facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned

on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after

the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts

by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-

ceive A Text

2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For

8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate

Functions.

3 — Push To End Call

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any

point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice

recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-

screen.

Uconnect 5.0

424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-

tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or

want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button

and say “Help.” The system will provide you with

a list of commands.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425

Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and

auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only

available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote

CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands and follow the prompts to

switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth

• Change source to AUX

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all

of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice

Command must match exactly how the artist, album,

song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect 5.0 Media

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy

with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-

nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check

UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and

pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button

. After the beep, say one of

the following commandsѧ

• Call John Smith

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)

• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media

428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone

button

and say “Call,” then pronounce the name

exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a

contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say

“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect 5.0 Phone

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push

the Phone button

and say Listen. (Must have com-

patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push

the Phone button

. After the beep, say: “Reply.”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat

one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system

prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.

No.

Start without

me.

I’ll be late.

Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-

ber> minutes

late.

Call me.

Are you there

yet?

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

I’ll call you

later.

I need

directions.

See you in

<number> of

minutes.

I’m on my way.

Can’t talk right

now.

I’m lost. Thanks.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-

tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-

tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming

text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple

iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but

if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can

use your voice to send a text message.

Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-

free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep

moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate

control.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees

• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees

iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle

4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to

adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice

Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or

steering wheel if equipped.

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and

become more productive when you know exactly how to

get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on

the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate

navigation at any time.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

. After

the beep, say:

• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”

• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address

800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button

. After

the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-

rized by the subscriber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take

advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next

section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,

press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get

started. Detailed registration instructions can be found

on the next page.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433

NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped

vehicles purchased within the continental United States,

Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where

coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

9-1-1 Call

Security Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn and Lights

Yelp Search

Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call

WiFi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

Vehicle Health Alert

Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a

problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key

systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner

Connect website moparownerconnect.com.

To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your

vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.

1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.

434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.

3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your

vehicle and handle all of the details.

Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,

press the “Apps

” button on the touchscreen to “Reg-

ister By Web” to complete the process using your smart-

phone or computer.

For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-

mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.

Mobile App

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435

To link your internet radio accounts:

1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile

device.

2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the

bottom of the app.

3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.

4. Enter your login information for the selected app and

press Link.

5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,

pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you

want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream

your personalized music.

NOTE:

• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply

visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up

Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).

• Once you download the app to your compatible

mobile device, you will also be able to start your

vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-

where.

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button

. After

the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-

sage to John Smith.”

2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the

message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to

process your message.

3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and

provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or

hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect

what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy

with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”

436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a

compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice

to send a personalized text message. For details about

MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming

text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple

iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle

4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437

TIP:

• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if

your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can

use your voice to send a text message.

• Messages are limited to 140 characters.

• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be

illuminated to use the feature.

Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)

Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your

voice to search for the most popular places or things

around you.

1. Press the “Apps

” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.

Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,

push the VR button

, then say: “YELP search.”

4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell

Uconnect the place or business that you’d like

Uconnect to find.

438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the

results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or

Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,

check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?

SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a

wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN

system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Show fuel prices

• Show 5 - day weather forecast

• Show extended weather

Yelp

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-

mand.

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use

your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set

reminders, and more. For further information go to the

Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.

Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from

incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes

on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-

nience there is a counter display to keep track of your

missed calls and text messages while you were using Do

Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text

message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call

and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

SiriusXM Travel Link

440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the

touchscreen while typing a custom message.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected

so you can still place a second call without being inter-

rupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-

hones.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on

phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE:

•

The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC

and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-

fications were met.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441

Additional Information

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a

trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks

and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,

Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered

trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7

days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca

Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET

Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

Sun., Closed

Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241 Please

have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.

442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................447

▫ Normal Starting.......................447

▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or

−30°C) .............................448

▫ Extended Park Starting..................448

▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................449

▫ After Starting ........................450

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .450

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............451

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............453

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .453

▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........453

▫ Gear Ranges .........................455

䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .....461

▫ Operation ..........................462

䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .464

䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........464

▫ Acceleration .........................464

▫ Traction ............................465

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............465

▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................465

▫ Shallow Standing Water .................466

䡵 POWER STEERING .....................467

䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) ............468

▫ Auto Park Brake ......................472

▫ SafeHold............................472

▫ Brake Service Mode ...................473

䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................474

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .475

▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .475

▫ Brake System Warning Light..............475

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............475

▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............477

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............478

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................478

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............481

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........482

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...........486

▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB)...............487

▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) ...............487

▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........487

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............488

▫ Tire Markings ........................488

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........492

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........493

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........495

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........500

▫ Tire Pressure ........................500

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................502

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .503

▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................503

▫ Tire Types ...........................504

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............506

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............506

▫ Tire Spinning ........................508

▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................509

▫ Life Of Tire .........................510

▫ Replacement Tires .....................510

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......512

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....513

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .514

▫ Base System .........................517

▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........520

▫ General Information....................524

䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................524

▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................525

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............525

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......526

▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................526

▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................527

▫ Fuel System Cautions...................527

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............528

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED ...........529

▫ E-85 General Information ...............529

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................529

▫ Fuel Requirements ....................530

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............531

▫ Starting ............................531

▫ Cruising Range .......................531

▫ Replacement Parts ....................531

▫ Maintenance ........................532

䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................532

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............535

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................536

▫ Certification Label ....................536

䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................538

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................539

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .539

▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive

(FWD) Models .......................540

▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) Models .......................541

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector/shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or

PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any

driving range.

Normal Starting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine

is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator

pedal.

Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and

release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start

within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat

the “Normal Starting” procedure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

Tip Start Feature

Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it as

soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue

to run, but will automatically disengage itself when the

engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will

disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, cycle

the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15

seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

Extended Park Starting

NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle

has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery

to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it

when the engine starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the

ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five

seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the

Extended Park Starting procedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow

the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat

the procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-

tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10

to 15 seconds before trying again.

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster

cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster

battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type

of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer

to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-

cies” for further information.

With Tip Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Ex-

tended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To

clear any excess fuel;

1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and

hold it

2. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release it

as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will

disengage automatically in 10 seconds.

3. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal.

4. Cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15

seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15

seconds before trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits

quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet

with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine

block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures

below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,

behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps

below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-

er’s side headlamp).

2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in

place.

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into

a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the

Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the

driver’s side headlamp.

NOTE:

• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed

option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords

are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and

6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.

• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least

one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the

engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater

cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt

electrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle

speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

•

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you

should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When

the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock

which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the

engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid

inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the trans-

mission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in

PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear

selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift

the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be

running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake

pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into

DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or

moving at low speeds.

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic

gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-

sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the

gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID).

To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.

Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to

access the L or S position. You must also press the brake

pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift

from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the

vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to

⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this sec-

tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as

PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the

appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal

driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet

the needs of FCA US’s current and future lineup of

FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined

to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel

economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combi-

nations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving

situations and conditions.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

Standard Shifter

The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE-

VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.

Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans-

mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.

Premium Shifter with Shift Paddles

The premium transmission gear selector (with manual

shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides

PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift

positions. Manual shifts can be made using the shift

paddles (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section).

Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or

SPORT position will manually select the transmission

gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument

cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector

position and the actual transmission gear (for example,

driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator

will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the

proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

Transmission Gear Selector

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-

tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill

grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is

in PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.

When the ignition is in the OFF position, the

transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-

hicle against unwanted movement.

(Continued)

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of

PARK, you must start the engine and also press the

brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector

could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicator should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission

gear position display and verify that it indicates the

PARK position (P).

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

winds), use the shift paddles (if equipped, refer to

⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section for further informa-

tion) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using

a lower gear will improve performance and extend

transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat

buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the

transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,

and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch

engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-

age due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-

sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn-

ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the

transmission may operate differently until the transmis-

sion cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque

converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are

inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the

“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).

Normal operation will resume once the transmission

temperature has risen to a suitable level.

SPORT (S) — If Equipped

This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift

schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-

creased to make full use of available engine power. To

access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and

rotate it fully clockwise.

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

LOW (L) — If Equipped

Use this range for engine braking when descending very

steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-

shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW

position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it

fully clockwise.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may

operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-

nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-

aging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,

shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine

turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized

dealer service is required.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until

the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles

[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher

when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may

seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when

cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will

function normally once the transmission is sufficiently

warm.

PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED

Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission

feature providing manual shift control, giving you more

control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi-

mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and

downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.

This system can also provide you with more control

during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,

mountain driving and many other situations.

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

Operation

When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it

will operate automatically, shifting between the nine

available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap

one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)

while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this

will activate a temporary Paddle Shift mode. The trans-

mission will revert back to normal operation after a

period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.

When the transmission gear selector is in the SPORT

position, tapping either shift paddle will activate ⬙perma-

nent⬙ Paddle Shift mode. The transmission will remain in

Paddle Shift mode until the driver deliberately disables

Paddle Shift (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter

Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the

next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift

mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift is

active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or

down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,

unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would

result. It will remain in the selected gear until another

upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described

below.

• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the

transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-

mum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator

pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to

automatic operation.

• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the

transmission will remain in the selected gear even

when maximum engine speed is reached (except the

transmission will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd

gear at wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise,

the transmission will upshift only when commanded

by the driver.

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will

automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop

(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-

rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow

starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should

manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle

accelerates.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to

over-speed, that shift will not occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low

of a vehicle speed.

• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the

transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current

speed.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

Paddle Shift mode is enabled.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a

fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)

shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in

the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle

Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED

This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).

The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional

driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions,

the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front

wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically

to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss,

the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle

input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be

sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle

launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!

All wheels must have the same size and type tires.

Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire

size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-

pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull

erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs

when there is a difference in the surface traction under

the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the

front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle

and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a

wedge of water to build up between the tire and road

surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or

complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To

reduce this possibility, the following precautions should

be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are

slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first

become visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a

sudden stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water

is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-

ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface

and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this

warning may result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions

and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping

distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-

ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the

brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-

sengers, and others around you.

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through

standing water that is deeper than the bottom of

the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in

the way before driving through the standing water.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave

effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage

to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always

inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-

mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,

fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after

driving through standing water. Do not continue to

(Continued)

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)

operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-

nated, as this may result in further damage. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious

internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

POWER STEERING

The electric power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in

tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light

efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the

electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces

assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you

will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose

a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be

obtained as soon as possible.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR

⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE

SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon

are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-

cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for

service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering

assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer

operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.

Under these conditions there will be a substantial

increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and

during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake

System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some

additional features that make the park brake more con-

venient and useful.

The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the

vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the

vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be

certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

You can engage the park brake in two ways;

• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.

• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-

ture in the customer programmable features section of

the Uconnect Settings.

The park brake switch is located in the center console.

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch

momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from

the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.

Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warn-

ing lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on

the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake

pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a

small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake

can be applied even when the ignition switch if OFF,

however, it can only be released when the ignition switch

in the RUN position.

NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB

switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in the applied

position or 90 seconds in the released position. The light

will extinguish upon releasing the switch.

If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking

brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-

sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is en-

gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument

cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-

nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a

small amount of brake pedal movement while the park-

ing brake is engaging.

Electric Park Brake Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

The park brake will release automatically when the

ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is

in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled,

and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the

accelerator pedal.

To release the parking brake manually, the ignition

switch must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake

pedal, then push the park brake switch down momen-

tarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the

back of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages.

You may also notice a small amount of movement in the

brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The

BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the

LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.

NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the

front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and

away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park

brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The

park brake should always be applied whenever the

driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob

from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A

child could operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in

PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll

and cause damage or injury.

• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-

gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow

the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake

system.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with

the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-

tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to

engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,

maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake

switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE

warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime

will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated

automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.

To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in

motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a

complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle

reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake

will remain engaged.

In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park

Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.

This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp

flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park

brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to

hold the vehicle stationary.

Auto Park Brake

The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied

automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and

the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park

Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection

through the customer programmable features section of

the Uconnect Settings.

Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed

by holding the EPB switch in the release position while

the transmission is being placed into PARK. This bypass

can be reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again,

or by driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20 km/h),

or by going to the personal setting menu and turning the

Auto Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.

SafeHold

SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake

System that will engage the park brake automatically if

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis-

sion is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver

door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no

attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,

the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the

vehicle from rolling.

SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the

Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while

the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safe-

Hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches

12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF

position and back to ON again.

Brake Service Mode

We recommend having your brakes serviced by your

authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for

which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.

You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake

service.

When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for

you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear

caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can

only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake

actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done

easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through EVIC

(Electronic Vehicle Information Center), Driver Informa-

tion Display (DID) or the Uconnect Settings in your

vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through

the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to

perform rear brake service.

Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order

to be activated:

• The vehicle must be at a standstill.

• The park brake must be unapplied.

• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp

will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.

When brake service work is complete, the following steps

must be followed to reset the parking brake system to

normal operation:

• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.

• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.

• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which

you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake

systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses

normal capability, the remaining system will still func-

tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking

effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel

during application, greater pedal force required to slow

or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System

Warning Light”.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,

repeated brake applications with the engine off) the

brakes will still function. However, the effort required to

brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required

with the power system operating.

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic

Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-

tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist

(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability

Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These

systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability

and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert

Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), and Dynamic

Steering Torque (DST).

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the braking

torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking

pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of

the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent

the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may

stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or

comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system

is not functioning properly and that immediate service is

required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not

come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased

vehicle stability and brake performance under most

braking conditions. The system automatically prevents

wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the

ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight

clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects

one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such

as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,

or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-

tion(s).

You also may experience the following when ABS acti-

vates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-

ment that may be susceptible to interference

caused by improperly installed or high output

radio transmitting equipment. This interference

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-

bility. Installation of such equipment should be

performed by qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to

slow down or stop.

(Continued)

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded

by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or

the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-

cation may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position

and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or

comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock

portion of the brake system is not functioning and that

service is required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake

System Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake

system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore

the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position, have the light

repaired as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-

ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-

cluding those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-

planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a

complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases

the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue

to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the

system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will

roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• Park brake must be off.

• Driver door must be closed.

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction

(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle

backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward

gears. The system will not activate if the transmission

is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with

a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will

remain active.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,

such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or

while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to other

vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-

hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-

tion is always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back

while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and

deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may

not be enough brake pressure to hold both the

vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake

pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an

incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-

tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake

pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the

parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-

play (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform

the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing

straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half

turn to the left.

6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch

bank below the climate control four times within

twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should

turn on and turn off two times.

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an

additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then

back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-

pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will

blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may

apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or

reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration

and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-

ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-

tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If

one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the

other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning

wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain

enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-

gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle

path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual

path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-

priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or

understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-

cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon

as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS

is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the

accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure

to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road

conditions.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent

(Continued)

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

accidents, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents

resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-

propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-

teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-

mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle

maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,

the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-

ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this

mode. This mode should be used for most driving

conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for

specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a

more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode

may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,

which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-

lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes

stuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the

“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will

illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push

the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”

will turn off.

NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting

off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to

allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,

sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be

accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC off”

button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the

situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn

ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”

button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTE:

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in

the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial

Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS

is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered

by the ESC system is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC

system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as

the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-

celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

customer has elected to have the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift

occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it

cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as

road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects

or other vehicles.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot

prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the

user’s safety or the safety of others.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to

reach full braking during emergency braking situations.

It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may

occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by

the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a

panic stop.

Rainy Brake Support (RBS)

Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance

in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small

amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup

on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-

shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake

Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and

no driver interaction is required.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS

modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for

certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is

detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering

wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize

optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain

vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives

that the feature is active is the torque applied to the

steering wheel.

NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver

realize the correct course of action through small torques

on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of

the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers

sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is

very important to realize that this feature will not steer

the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for

steering the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

EXAMPLE:

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or

– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)

tire:

•

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•

LL = Light load tire or

•

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this

tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three

hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

Term Definition

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible

cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation

pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure

as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-

cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the

recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s

side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-

tion of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will

be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas

are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the

right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when they are under-

inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-

ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it

meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and

additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have

experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-

diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or

on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be

aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold

driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury

or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates

the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the origi-

nal equipment tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited

driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-

ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-

mation.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in

“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And

Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and

wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle

of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended

tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on

the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”

or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled

on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire and

wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use

only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-

stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original

equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it

on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss

of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or

for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping.

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-

ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

Tire Tread

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be

replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for

further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

•

Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can

cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire

tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread

life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-

tenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for

the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-

ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of

this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two

rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a

wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body

clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard

against damage:

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as

recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

• Install on front tires only.

• For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use

of a snow traction device with a maximum projection

of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)

between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable

handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-

tween tires and other suspension components, it is

(Continued)

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)

important that only traction devices in good condi-

tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise

occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove

the damaged parts of the device before further use.

• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-

tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

•

Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-

tions on the method of installation, operating

speed, and conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device manufac-

turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or

unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”

shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern

does not apply to some directional tires that must not be

reversed.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-

mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that

when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure

will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on

cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three

hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not

exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the

tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in

“Starting And Operating” for information on how to

properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will

also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and

there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

Tire Rotation

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects

and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-

ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,

you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended

cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update and the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the

system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle

may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-

tion.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire

pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause

the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),

but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still

be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value.

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-

eration or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-

come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

sealant it is recommended that you take your

vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire

failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-

flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure

gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light”.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument

cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and

a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or

more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you

should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation

pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the

system receives the updated tire pressures, the system

will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Telltale Light” will turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off

when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault

can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full

Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare

tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.

Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in

the spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size

spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will

sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on

upon the next ignition cycle.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid.

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound

and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update

automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn

off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-

pressure warning limit in any of the four active road

tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20

minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System — If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime

will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the

four active road tires. In addition, the Driver Information

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

Display (DID) will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and

a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with

the low tire pressure values in a different color.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a

different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s

recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in

the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the

updated tire pressures, the system will automatically

update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the

DID will return to their original color, and the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

SERVICE TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a

⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five

seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being

received.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-

viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no

longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM

message will no longer display, and a pressure value will

display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur

due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicles With Compact Spare

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure

monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-

tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-

ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS

Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.

In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a

different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙

message.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid. In addition, the DID will display a “SERVICE

SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display

dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will

sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off

for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID

will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five

seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,

the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the

“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in

the DID will display a new pressure value instead of

dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the

low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active

road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

These engines are designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide opti-

mum fuel economy and performance

when using high quality unleaded “Regu-

lar” gasoline having a posted octane num-

ber of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of

higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it

will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in

these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-

proved performance and durability of engine and fuel

system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of

these blends may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system components,

cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,

and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to

illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they

should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater

than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more

than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are

not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or

not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-

line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)

is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal

and California reformulated gasoline.

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

that have these additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-

mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-

tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in

minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-

able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-

mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should

be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket

and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-

formance and damage the emissions control sys-

tem.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-

vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations

of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such

fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer and may void or not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against

you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

(Continued)

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal

conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive

with all side windows fully open.

FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel

vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a

unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or

Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please

refer to the other sections of this manual for information

on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and

non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a

yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%

unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could

cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-

ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or

near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube

cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a

cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

Fuel Requirements

If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on

unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85

fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.

For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating

between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.

When switching fuel types:

• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.

• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at

least 5 miles (8 km).

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard

starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.

NOTE:

• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With

non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and

rough idle following start up may be experienced even

if the above recommendations are followed, especially

when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully

compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your

engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be

caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline

additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron

may be used.

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-

lated engine oils. These special requirements are included

in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting

FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended

that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the

requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.

MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed

during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional pro-

tection to FCA US LLC engines.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use

when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the

range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time

it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and

a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)

until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be

improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may

improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the

ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).

Cruising Range

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter

than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be

experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per

liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-

mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement Parts

All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.

Ethanol compatible service components are required.

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

CAUTION!

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol

compatible components can damage your vehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your

vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and

may affect drivability.

ADDING FUEL

The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on

the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is

lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap

has been designed for use with this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is

being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-

tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel

filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities

into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-

ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping

from the system.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to

turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.

1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.

2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (9

o’clock position) and release to open.

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

3. Remove the fuel filler cap and hang fuel filler cap by

tether on fuel fill door to prevent damage to body side.

4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

tank is full.

Fuel Filler Cap Release Fuel Filler Door and Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook

1 — Fuel Filler Door Actuator

2 — Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel

filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.

6. Tighten the fuel filler cap about one quarter turn until

you hear one click. This is an indication that the fuel

filler cap is properly tightened.

7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge

(9 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then

release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.

NOTE:

• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel

filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on

the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the

ice build up.

• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL

will come on. Be sure the fuel filler cap is tightened

every time the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a

“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the

fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard

Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for

further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load

weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the

driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo

area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the

system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-

creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and

rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined

by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should

then be determined separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-

ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the

front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is

within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted

from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the

specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier

items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,

parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to

lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of

your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground

Front-Wheel Drive

(FWD) Models

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

Models

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK OK

NOTE:

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is

disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-

tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park

Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer

programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.

• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow

applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and

provincial Highway Safety offices for additional de-

tails.

• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial

towing service please refer to “Towing A Disabled

Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)

Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain

will result.

Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is

allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.

This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle

trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Place the transmission in PARK.

5. Turn the engine OFF.

6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not

start the engine.

8. Press and hold the brake pedal.

9. Release the parking brake.

10. Turn the ignition OFF.

11. Remove the Key Fob.

12. Release the brake pedal.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the

drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-

ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the

ground.

• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and

remains released, while being towed.

(Continued)

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered un-

der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

Models

Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do

not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer

unit.

NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle

trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the

ground can cause severe transmission and/or power

transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing

is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........545

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............545

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS ......................546

▫ Torque Specifications ...................546

䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........548

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................548

▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .550

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........550

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........553

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........558

▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........559

▫ Preparations For Jacking ................560

▫ Jacking Instructions ...................561

▫ Road Tire Installation...................569

䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........572

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............573

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................574

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............576

䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................578

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........581

▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models .........584

▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ...........584

544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the

switch bank below the radio screen.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers

may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

•

In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in

NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

•

You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to

high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement

to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the

engine cooling system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”

pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with

the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for

service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug

nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before

tightening.

546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be

sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws

or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service

Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-

mately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you

to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a

maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in

the trunk.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

Pull Strap

548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit. 4. Remove Tire Service Kit.

Tire Service Kit Fastener Tire Service Kit

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and

Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at

the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to

assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle

2 — Deflation Button

3 — Pressure Gauge

4 — Power Button

5 — Mode Select Knob

6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)

550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one

tire application use and need to be replaced after each

use. Always replace these components immediately at

your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,

clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material

from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once

the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and

properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem

on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire

Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate

bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,

located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the

bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,

or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air

Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob

(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to

avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit

Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4

inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit when using

the Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants

of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in

the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to

you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,

swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes

skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-

ately with plenty of water if there is any contact

with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as

possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)

552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-

sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of

reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-

diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of

water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician

immediately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the

deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to

reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat

on the ground. This will provide the best positioning

of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated

tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as

necessary to place the valve stem in this position

before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK and turn Off the

ignition.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the

Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap

from the fitting at the end of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the

deflated tire.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw

the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the

valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the

vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) from the tire.

Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire

Service Kit.

• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white

fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the

Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the

tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10

seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve

stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.

Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.

Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant

Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power

Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt

power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if

available. Make sure the engine is running before

turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous

use. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and

the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air

Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no

longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70

seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant

Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70

psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease

quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the

actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is

empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-

ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to

operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure

indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire

pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)

pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-

tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-

mended inflation pressure before continuing.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at

least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service

Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-

ment panel.

Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the

valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555

hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage

location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get

hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-

tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-

rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal

Tire Service Kit components which may cause

permanent damage to the kit.

(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,

drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure

distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have

the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using

Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until

the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this

warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal

to you, your passengers, and others around you.

(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop

to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air

Mode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the

vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and

screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve

stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure

Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit

and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire

and loading information label on the driver-side door

opening.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-

tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-

mended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,

reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12

Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in

the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the

earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire

service center.

5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)

assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-

sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-

ment.”

NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-

rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed

using the Tire Service Kit.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the

recessed area under the sealant bottle.

3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose

of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit

housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so

that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in

the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the

housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the

bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its

storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the

vehicle.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

(Continued)

558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under

an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access

the jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

Pull Strap

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559

3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.

4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and

wheel chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly.

Remove the chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the

jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench,

and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.

5. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery

areas.

Jack And Spare Tire Fastener

560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shifter into the park position.

5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.

6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite of the jacking position. For

example, if changing the right front

tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place

both chocks under the tire.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK.

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

Jack Warning Label

562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and wheel chocks

from the spare wheel as an assembly. Remove the

chocks from the jack assembly.

NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack

with two attachment points. When the jack is partially

expanded, the tension between the two attachment

points holds the jack handle in place.

Jacking Locations

Removing Jack Handle From Jack

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563

2. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-

ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place

both chocks under the tire.

3. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center

cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench

to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the

vehicle.

4. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench

to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the

wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-

clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

5. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is

closest to the flat tire.

Front Body Flange

564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Rear Body Flange Front Body Flange Engaged

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565

6. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack

saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the

jack saddle between the locating notches on the sill

flange.

7. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire

and install the spare tire.

Rear Body Flange Engaged Front Jacking Location

566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

8. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

9. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem

facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the

spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Rear Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567

NOTE:

• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a

center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.

• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use

Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in

“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,

cautions, and information about the spare tire, its

use, and operation.

10. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the

wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle

has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

Mounting Spare Tire

568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

11. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

12. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern

until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer

to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper

lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-

ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by

your authorized dealer or at a service station.

13. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel

chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-

bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow

the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the

parking brake before driving the vehicle.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Road Tire Installation

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with

wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel

which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the

wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward

the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569

3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the

valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,

snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not

use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

4. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until

each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover

2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel

3 — Wheel Bolt

570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,

have them checked with a torque wrench by your

authorized dealer or service station.

7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel

chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-

bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the

assembly using the means provided. Release the park-

ing brake before driving the vehicle.

8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque

with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are

properly seated against the wheel.

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until

each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper

lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,

have them checked with a torque wrench by your

authorized dealer or service station.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571

5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel

chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-

bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the

assembly using the means provided. Release the park-

ing brake before driving the vehicle.

6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque

with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are

properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the

engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent

electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

1 — Positive Battery Post

2 — Negative Battery Post

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could

result in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)

post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-

cal spark could cause the battery to explode and

could result in personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables

in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets

draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not

in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough without engine operation,

the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to

degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from

starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it

can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE

and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.

NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be

achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.

Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for

more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal

to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that

will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the

wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,

before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-

mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC

Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to

transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-

gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at

least one minute after every five rocking-motion

cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce

the risk of transmission failure during prolonged

efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the

wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the

parking brake, before activating the Manual Park

Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will

allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by

the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow

vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an

unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or

death for those in or around the vehicle.

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-

sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),

a Manual Park Release is available.

Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the

Manual Park Release access cover, which is under-

neath the rubber storage bin liner in the center console

pass-through.

Manual Park Release location

578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever,

and use it to pull the lever upwards.

4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward,

until it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual

Park Release lever is locked in the released position.

Manual Park Release Cover Manual Park Release Tether

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579

5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.

Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is

securely connected to a tow vehicle.

To reset the Manual Park Release:

1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever.

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and

down to its original position.

3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin

liner.

Locked Position

580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled

vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers

or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding

vehicles under tow must be observed.

NOTE:

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is

disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-

tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park

Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer

programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581

• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical

failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is en-

gaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear

wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a

flatbed.

Vehicle Recovery Tow Points

Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points

that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on

the underbody of the vehicle.

NOTE:

• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly

seated and secured in the attachment points.

• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained

professional only.

• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled

vehicle from its environment.

Front Of Vehicle Recovery Points

582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Recovery feature:

• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.

• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.

• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.

• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over

the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.

Recovery load should:

• Be applied at constant speed.

• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length

of the vehicle.

• Not be an abrupt acceleration.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position.

NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park

Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the

ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake

pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the

ignition in the ON/RUN position, you must manually

disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s

door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then

pushing the EPB switch down.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is

discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section

for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK

for towing.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not

attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and

remains released, while being towed.

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with

all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must

towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a

towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front

wheels raised).

NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,

and remains released, while being towed.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-

age from improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels

OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the

vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised

and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels

on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal

damage to the transmission or power transfer unit

will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when

towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........589

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........590

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .591

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............591

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS ..........................592

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................593

䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................594

䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........594

▫ Engine Oil ..........................595

▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................598

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................599

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............599

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............601

▫ Body Lubrication .....................605

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............605

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................606

▫ Exhaust System ......................606

▫ Cooling System ......................609

▫ Brake System ........................615

▫ Automatic Transmission ................616

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion ...........................618

䡵 FUSES ..............................625

▫ Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ..........626

▫ Interior Fuses ........................637

䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................638

䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................639

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................641

▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps .....641

▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp ................644

▫ Front Side Marker Lamps ...............646

▫ Front Fog Lamp ......................647

▫ Backup Lamps (Passenger Side) ...........648

▫ Backup Lamps (Driver Side) ..............650

▫ Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp .............651

▫ License Plate Lamp ....................652

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................653

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

PARTS ..............................654

▫ Engine .............................654

▫ Chassis ............................657

588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill

4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter

590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard

Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will

also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591

further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a

“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the

fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard

Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for

further information.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which

you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the

following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do

not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you place the ignition in the off

position or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed

to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you

have any doubt about your ability to perform a service

job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components

which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized dealer or qualified

repair center.

(Continued)

594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your

vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-

vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-

nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,

transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-

tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing

procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.

There are three possible dipstick types,

• Crosshatched zone.

• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.

• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of

the range and MAX at the high end of the range.

NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the cross-

hatch markings on the dipstick.

Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the

low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the

high end of the range marking.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage

your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet

the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The

manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-

20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-

gine oils.

596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L, 2.4L

Engine

MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US

Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix

or equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US

Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix

or equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-

partment” illustration in this section.

NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA

US Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell

Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine

oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine

oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade

number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-

tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where

used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-

able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The

quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only

high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters

and are recommended.

598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”

maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-

mended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599

WARNING! (Continued)

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-

fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-

fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601

manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service

be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and

recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is

operating or personal injury may result.

The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on

the lower right of center console. Perform the following

procedure to replace the filter:

Remove the passenger side console closeout cover, by

inserting fingers between bottom of side panel (at rear)

and the carpet. Pull outboard to disengage the 3 clips.

2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage

the front retaining tab and remove the cover.

3. Carefully remove 3 push pins holding the hush panel

and remove the part.

Console Closeout Panel

602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the

top bottom of the door and lift the tab at the top of the

door to release the cover then rotate remove the door

out and lift up.

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of

the housing. Take note of the air filter position flow

direction indicators.

Hush Panel Air Filter Cover Location

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603

6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position

indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.

CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to

indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure

to properly install the filter will result in the need to

replace it more often.

7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash

panel and console closeout.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

A/C Air Filter

604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should

be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,

such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after

lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing

other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-

nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-

tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending

on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-

mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,

water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are

present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine

compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the

reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with

windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and

operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the

residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some

washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe

clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-

tact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control

device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-

mance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the

system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with

fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an

authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by

gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically

down the face of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at

the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the

entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-

freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery

bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE

CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead

to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system please contact your

local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains

visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and

flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to

MS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

(Continued)

610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-

lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000

miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-

ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-

ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-

terial Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-

tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system, please contact your

local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as

possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is

overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool

an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to

build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding

or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the

system is hot or under pressure.

(Continued)

612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek

emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground

spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant

(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges

indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap

unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze

point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is

satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once

a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets

the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032

should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in

the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-

freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant

expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-

ing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure tested

for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion

protection of your engine which contains aluminum

components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

•

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY

the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in

unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,

poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when

performing under hood services or immediately if the

“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be

expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level

should be checked when pads are replaced. However,

low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup

may be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615

WARNING! (Continued)

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has

been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master

cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the

air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-

longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be

damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

Automatic Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this

section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain

the transmission fluid at the correct level using the

recommended fluid.

616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any

transmission; only the approved lubricant should be

used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission. Automatic

Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and

its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the

transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they

may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can

check your transmission fluid level using special service

tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-

tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617

the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-

hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe

transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the

life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-

ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes

contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is

disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

•

Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)

can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly

with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.

620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-

nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-

ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used

on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain

this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These

products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions

or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-

tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use

a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for

leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid

soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather

upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not

required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,

suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,

painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may

cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be

covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton

based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as

damage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog

lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-

age than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows

equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or

abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a

clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the

vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-

propriate replacement fuse with the same amp

rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse

with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never

replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other

material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in

serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-

age.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off

and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625

Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine

compartment near the battery. This center contains car-

tridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and

relays. A label that identifies each component is printed

on the inside of the cover.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F06 – – Not Used

F07 – – Not Used

F08 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Control Module (ECM)/Fuel Inj.

F09 – – Not Used

Power Distribution Center

626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit (PTU) –

If Equipped

F11 – – Not Used

F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped

F13 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/VSM

(Engine Stop/Start Only)

F14 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If

Equipped/RDM/Brake System Module

(BSM)/Brake Pedal Switch/EPB

(Electric Park Brake)

F15 – – Not Used

F16 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coil

F17 – – Not Used

F18 – – Not Used

F19 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch

F21 – – Not Used

F22 – 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan Enable

F23 – 70 Amp Tan Body Controller Module (BCM) –

Feed 2

F23 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2 –

If Equipped With Engine Stop/Start

Option

F24 – – Not Used

F25B – 20 Amp Yellow Front Washer Pump – If Equipped with

Engine Stop/Start Option

F26 – – Not Used

F27 – – Not Used

F28 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (TCM)

F29 – – Not Used

628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F30 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/EPS/

Fuel Pump Relay Feed

F31 – – Not Used

F32 – – Not Used

F33 – – Not Used

F34 – – Not Used

F35 – – Not Used

F36 – – Not Used

F37 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan PWM Controller

F38 – – Not Used

F39 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor

F40 – – Not Used

F41 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1 –

If Equipped With Engine Stop/Start

Option

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F41 60 Amp Yellow — Body Controller Module (BCM) –

Feed 1

F42 – – Not Used

F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor

F44 – – Not Used

F45 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If

Equipped

F46 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof – If Equipped

F47 – – Not Used

F48 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module (DDM)

F49 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter (115V A/C) – If

Equipped

F50 30 Amp Pink – Windshield Wiper Smart Motor

(WWSM)

F51 – – Not Used

630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F52 – – Not Used

F53 30 Amp Pink – Brake System Module BSM & Valves

F54 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller Module (BCM) –

Feed 3

F55 – 10 Amp Red Blind Spot Sensors/Compass/Rearview

Camera – If Equipped

F56 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/RF Hub

F57 – – Not Used

F58 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module/Voltage

Stability Module (VSM) #2 –

If Equipped With Engine Stop/Start

Option

F59 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)

F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet – Center Console

F61 – – Not Used

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F62 – – Not Used

F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If Equipped

F64 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped

F65 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/

Humidity Sensor/Driver Assist System

Module (DASM)/Park Assist (PAM) –

If Equipped With Engine Stop/Start

Option

F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

F67 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/

Humidity Sensor/Drivers Assist System

Module (DASM)/Park Assist (PAM) –

If Equipped

F68 – – Not Used

632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F69 – 10 Amp Red Gear Shift Module (GSM)/Active Grill

Shutter (AGS). – If Equipped/EPB SW

F70 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) –

If Equipped with Engine Stop/Start

Option

F71 – 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Right – If Equipped

with Engine Stop/Start Option

F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If Equipped

F73 – – Not Used

F74 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster/Defogger

F75 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter

F76 – 10 Amp Red Drivers Window SW– If Equipped

F77 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port/Brake Pedal Switch

F78 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port/Steering Column

Control Module (SCCM)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F79 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Switch

Bank/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/

EPB SW

F80 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio

F81 – – Not Used

F82 – – Not Used

F83 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)

F84 30 Amp Pink – Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left

F85 – – Not Used

F86 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns – If Equipped With Engine Stop/

Start Option

F87A – 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Left – If Equipped

Engine Stop/Start Option

634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F88 – 10 Amp Red Collision Mitigation Module (CMM)/

Electrochromatic Mirror/Haptic Lane

Feedback Module (Half)/Humidity

Sensor– If Equipped

F89 – – Not Used

F90 – – Not Used

F91 – – Not Used

F92 – – Not Used

F93 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump

Motor – If Equipped

F94 30 Amp Pink – Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right

F95 – 10 Amp Red Electrochromatic Mirror/Rain/Pass.

Window SW/Power Outlet Console

Illumination/Sensor/Sunroof – If

Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description

F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

(Airbag)

F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

(Airbag)

F98 – 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier – If Equipped

F99 – – Not Used

F100 – – Not Used

636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Fuses

The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com-

partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-

ment panel.

Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left

F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting

F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren

F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)

F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock

F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front

F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns

F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support

F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If

Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637

Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)

F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp

F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left

F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right

F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21

days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.

You may:

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W

Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W

Visor Vanity Lamp A6220

Glove Compartment Lamp A6220

Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140

Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 579

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

High Intensity Discharge Headlamp HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Bi-Halogen Headlamp 9005HL+

Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24W SV

Side Marker Lamp W3W

Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Front Fog Lamp H11

LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21W

Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Backup Lamp 921

License Lamp W5W

640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric

conditions change to allow the condensation to change

back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually

accelerate the clearing process.

Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps

Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Headlamps — If Equipped

The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge

light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even

with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should

not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source

yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,

when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to

the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after

approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of

HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned

ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-

cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized

dealer for service.

Bi-Halogen Headlamps

1. Remove the top pushpin on the headlamp access door

in the wheel liner to access the headlamp assembly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641

2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the

headlamp bulb cap.

3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it

counterclockwise to unlock it.

4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and

rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.

Access Door Headlamp Bulb Cap

642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and

then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643

6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in

place.

7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous-

ing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.

8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.

Front Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood.

NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be

necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly

on the passenger side of the vehicle.

2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing all push pins

and lifting beauty cover.

3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and

loosening the 5th inboard fastener.

4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly

counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn

signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.

Beauty Cover

644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-

ment bulb.

6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into

the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp

socket clockwise to lock it in place.

7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.

8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.

9. Install beauty cover.

Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket

Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645

Front Side Marker Lamps

1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner

and carefully peel back liner for access.

2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and

rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the

lamp assembly.

3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket

and replace with a new bulb.

4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly

and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.

5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the

three fasteners.

Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners

Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal

646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Fog Lamp

1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout,

and peel down the lower closeout.

2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.

3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,

and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the

front fog lamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-

ment bulb.

Lower Closeout

Front Fog Lamp Socket

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into

the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector

clockwise to lock it in place.

6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure

with the three fasteners.

Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)

1. Open trunk lid.

2. Remove the passenger side access cover.

3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.

4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk

lid handle.

NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid

trim push pins to gain access.

5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk

lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.

648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4

turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk

lid lamp housing.

Backup Lamp Socket

7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the

replacement bulb.

8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp

housing.

Inner Deck Panel

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649

9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock

it into place.

10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a

push pin if removed.

11. Install access cover.

Backup Lamps (Driver Side)

1. Open trunk lid.

2. Remove the drivers side access cover.

3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.

NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid

trim push pins to gain access.

4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk

lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.

NOTE: passenger side shown the drivers side is similar.

Backup Lamp Socket

5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4

turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk

lid lamp housing.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the

replacement bulb.

650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp

housing.

8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock

it into place.

9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a

push pin if removed.

10. Install the access cover.

Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasp-

ing the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the

tail lamp housing bolts.

3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts

Tail Lamp Beauty Cover

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651

4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dis-

lodge the two out bored ball studs from the socket

fasteners.

NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to

remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket

fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing.

5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn

counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp

housing.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the

replacement bulb.

7. Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and

rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in

place.

8. Install the tail lamp housing.

9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.

License Plate Lamp

1. Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly

and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to

remove.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the

replacement bulb.

3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.

Tail Lamp Bolts

652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

2.4L and 3.6L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters

Cooling System*

2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

8.7 Quarts 8.2 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-

nology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA

Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine

Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Stan-

dard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.

Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine

Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Stan-

dard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.

Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If

Equipped

87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If

Equipped

87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-

mission Fluid, or equivalent.

Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or

performance of your transmission.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,

SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake

fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only

recommended brake fluids.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............660 ▫ Maintenance Chart ....................662

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change

indicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for

scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions

such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or

cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil

Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-

ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to

illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last

reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,

within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”

in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or

⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle

is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is

operated predominately at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe

Duty.

660 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,

even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns

on.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and

brake master cylinder, fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following

page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-

lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator

system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses

and park brake

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and

hoses

• Inspect exhaust system

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or

off-road conditions

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661

Maintenance Chart

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,

and replace if necessary.

XXX X X X X

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X

Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler

pulley, and replace if necessary

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X

662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace spark plugs ** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes

first.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,

yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

(Continued)

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 663

WARNING! (Continued)

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and

effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

664 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE .......................667

▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............667

▫ Prepare A List ........................667

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............667

䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............667

▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............668

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........668

▫ In Mexico Contact .....................669

▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........669

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................669

▫ Service Contract ......................669

䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............671

䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................671

䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............671

▫ In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.......................671

▫ In Canada ...........................672

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............672

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................673

▫ Treadwear...........................673

▫ Traction Grades .......................674

▫ Temperature Grades....................674

666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have

the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 667

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-

cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 247-9753

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,

or other reproductive harm.

670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC

warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),

or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-

mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-

ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,

and/or components is written in straightforward lan-

guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-

ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests

and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-

quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included

are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-

cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety

tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal

safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

674 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675

INDEX

About Your Brakes ........................474

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .182

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............611

Additives, Fuel ...........................527

Adjust

Down ...............................141

Forward ..............................141

Rearward .............................141

Up .................................141

AirBag...............................61, 62

Advance Front Air Bag ...............62, 63, 64

Air Bag Operation .......................64

Air Bag Warning Light ..................65, 82

Driver Knee Air Bag ......................75

Enhanced Accident Response ................81

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................85

FrontAirBag......................61, 62, 65

Front Passenger Knee Air Bag ...............75

If A Deployment Occurs ...................80

Knee Impact Bolsters .....................74

Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............84

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............83

Side Air Bags ...........................75

Transporting Pets .......................107

Air Bag Deployment ........................61

Air Bag Light ......................82, 110, 322

Air Bag Maintenance .......................84

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .599

Air Conditioner Maintenance .................601

Air Conditioning ......................398, 403

Air Conditioning Controls................398, 403

Air Conditioning Filter ..................419, 602

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........418, 420

Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................601

Air Conditioning System ..........398, 403, 416, 601

Air Filter ...............................599

Air Pressure, Tires.........................502

678 INDEX

Alarm

Arm The System ........................19

Disarm The System .......................20

Rearming The System .....................19

Tamper Alert ...........................21

Vehicle Security Alarm ....................19

Alarm, Panic .............................24

Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................325

All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................464

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............610, 653

Disposal ..............................613

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................475

Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................341

Appearance Care .........................618

Assist, Hill Start ..........................478

Auto Down Power Windows ..................42

Automatic Door Locks ......................34

Automatic Headlights ......................160

Automatic High Beams .....................161

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........416

Automatic Transaxle .......................451

Automatic Transmission .................453, 618

Adding Fluid .......................618, 657

Fluid And Filter Changes ..................618

Fluid Change ..........................618

Fluid Level Check ...................616, 617

Fluid Type .........................616, 657

Special Additives .......................617

Autostick ...............................461

Auto Unlock, Doors ........................34

Auto Up Power Windows ....................43

Axle Lubrication ..........................657

Battery .............................327, 599

Charging System Light ...................327

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........25

Remote Battery Replacement ................25

INDEX 679

Transmitter Battery Replacement .............25

Belts, Seat...............................110

Body Mechanism Lubrication .................605

B-Pillar Location ..........................495

Brake Assist System .......................478

Brake Control System, Electronic ..............475

Brake Fluid .............................657

Brake System .........................474, 615

Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................474

Fluid Check ........................615, 657

Master Cylinder ........................615

Warning Light .........................323

Brake/Transmission Interlock .................453

Brightness, Interior Lights ...................167

Bulb Replacement ..................639, 641, 646

Bulbs, Light.......................112,639, 646

Camera, Rear ............................268

Capacities, Fluid ..........................653

Caps, Filler

Fuel .................................532

Oil (Engine) ....................589, 590, 597

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................612

Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............109, 528

Cargo Area Features .......................304

Cargo Compartment .......................304

Car Washes .............................619

Certification Label.........................536

Chains, Tire .............................512

Changing A Flat Tire .......................558

Chart, Tire Sizing .........................489

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .592

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............108

Checks, Safety ...........................108

Child Restraint ............................86

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ...........................90

Center Seat LATCH ......................99

680 INDEX

Child Restraints .........................86

Child Seat Installation .................102, 104

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......101

Infants And Child Restraints ................88

Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....99

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle

Seat Belt ..............................102

LATCH Positions ........................94

Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............97

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......93

Older Children And Child Restraints ..........89

Seating Positions ........................92

Using The Top Tether Anchorage ............105

Child Safety Locks .........................34

Clean Air Gasoline ........................525

Cleaning

Wheels ...............................620

Climate Control ..........................398

Coin Holder .............................300

Cold Weather Operation ....................448

Compact Spare Tire........................507

Console, Floor ...........................300

Console, Overhead ........................271

Contract, Service ..........................669

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........612

Cooling System...........................609

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............611

Coolant Capacity .......................653

Coolant Level ..........................613

Disposal Of Used Coolant .................613

Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................610

Inspection .........................609, 613

Points To Remember .....................614

Pressure Cap ..........................612

Radiator Cap ..........................612

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......610, 653, 654

Corrosion Protection .......................618

Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............182, 371

INDEX 681

Cruise Light ......................348, 349, 350

Cupholders .............................297

Customer Assistance .......................667

Data Recorder, Event .......................85

Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............169

Daytime Running Lights ....................162

Dealer Service............................594

Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................46

Deck Lid, Power Release .....................45

Defroster, Rear Window.....................308

Defroster, Windshield ...................110,401

Diagnostic System, Onboard .................591

Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................165

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) ...........................595

Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................581

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................613

Door Ajar...............................332

Door Ajar Light ..........................332

Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......34

Door Locks ..........................24, 31

KeyFob ............................31, 33

Key Fob Emergency Key ................25, 34

Manual Door Locks ......................31

Power Door Locks .......................33

Remote ...............................31

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..............31, 33

Door Locks, Automatic ......................34

Door Opener, Garage.......................274

Driver Information Display (DID)

Controls ..............................364

Display ..............................364

Driver Information Display (DID) ............364

Instrument Cluster ......................364

Messages ..........................355, 367

682 INDEX

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................145

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water ................................465

E-85 Fuel ...............................529

Electrical Power Outlets.....................293

Electric Parking Brake ......................468

Electric Rear Window Defrost.................308

Electric Remote Mirrors .....................129

Electronic Brake Control System ...............475

Anti-Lock Brake System ..................475

Traction Control System ...................481

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....177, 182

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............482

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........329

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......268

Change Engine Oil ...................354, 366

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .352

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Setup Menu ...........................352

EVIC Display ..........................352

EVIC Messages .....................355, 367

Selectable Menu Items ....................357

Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................46

Emergency, In Case Of

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................545

Jacking ...............................558

Jump Starting ..........................572

Overheating ...........................545

Towing ..............................581

Emergency Trunk Release ....................46

Emission Control System Maintenance ..........592

Engine..............................589, 590

Air Cleaner ...........................599

Block Heater ..........................450

Break-In Recommendations ................107

Checking Oil Level ......................595

INDEX 683

Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................654

Cooling ..............................609

Exhaust Gas Caution .................109, 528

Fails To Start ..........................449

Flooded, Starting .......................449

Fuel Requirements ......................524

Jump Starting ..........................572

Oil ...........................595, 653, 654

Oil Filler Cap ...................589, 590, 597

Oil Filter .............................598

Oil Selection .......................596, 653

Oil Synthetic ..........................598

Overheating ...........................545

Starting ..............................447

Engine Oil Viscosity .......................597

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................597

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............81

Entry System, Illuminated ....................21

Ethanol .............................525, 529

Event Data Recorder ........................85

Exhaust Gas Caution ...................109, 528

Exhaust System .......................109, 606

Exterior Lighting ......................159, 646

Exterior Lights ........................112,646

Filters

Air Cleaner ...........................599

Air Conditioning ....................419, 602

Engine Oil .........................598, 654

Engine Oil Disposal .....................598

Flashers

Hazard Warning ........................545

Turn Signal ..................112,165, 347, 644

Flash-To-Pass ............................165

Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range .........................531

Engine Oil ............................531

Fuel Requirements ...................529, 530

684 INDEX

Maintenance ...........................532

Replacement Parts .......................531

Starting ..............................531

Flooded Engine Starting ....................449

Floor Console ............................300

Fluid, Brake .............................657

Fluid Capacities ..........................653

Fluid Leaks .............................112

Fluid Level Checks

Brake ................................615

Engine Oil ............................595

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........654

Fog Lights ...........................163, 647

Fog Light Service .........................647

Folding Rear Seat .........................152

Forward Collision Warning ..................209

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................576

Front Position Light .......................646

Fuel...................................524

Additives .............................527

Clean Air .............................525

Ethanol ...........................525, 529

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................532

Gasoline ..............................524

Light ................................340

Materials Added ........................527

Methanol .............................525

Octane Rating ......................524, 654

Requirements ..........................524

Specifications ..........................654

Tank Capacity ..........................653

Fuel, Flexible ............................529

Fuses ..................................625

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........274, 282

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................532

Gasoline,

Clean Air ........................525

Gasoline, Reformulated .....................525

INDEX 685

Gear Ranges .............................455

Glass Cleaning ...........................623

GVWR .................................536

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water .........................465

Hazard Warning Flasher ....................545

Headlights

Automatic ............................160

Bulb Replacement .......................641

Cleaning .............................623

Delay ................................160

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........165

Lights On Reminder .....................163

On With Wipers ........................160

Passing ..............................165

Replacing .............................641

Switch ...............................159

Time Delay ............................160

Head Restraints ..........................148

Head Rests..............................148

Heated Mirrors ...........................130

Heater..............................398, 403

Heater, Engine Block .......................450

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .165

Hill Start Assist...........................478

Holder, Coin.............................300

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............274

Ignition

Key..................................12

Illuminated Entry ..........................21

Courtesy Lights .........................21

Front Courtesy Overhead Console ............21

Illuminated Entry ........................21

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter .......21

Inside Rearview Mirror ..................120, 121

686 INDEX

Instrument Cluster ........315, 318, 326, 331, 343, 347

Instrument Cluster ...................354, 366

Instrument Panel And Controls ...............314

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............624

Interior Appearance Care....................622

Interior Fuses ............................637

Interior Lights ...........................167

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............171

Introduction ..............................4

Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................296

Jacking Instructions........................561

Jack Location ............................559

Jack Operation ........................558, 561

Jump Starting ............................572

Key Fob

Emergency Key .........................13

Lock The Doors .........................24

Panic Alarm ............................24

Programming Additional Key Fobs .........18, 25

Programming Additional Transmitters .......18, 25

Remote Battery Replacement ................25

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..............13, 22

Unlatch The Trunk .......................24

Unlock The Doors .......................23

Key-In Reminder ..........................15

Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................36

Enter The Trunk ......................24, 36

KeyFob...............................36

Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ................24, 36

Passive Entry ...........................36

Passive Entry Programming .................36

Remote Control .........................36

Unlock From The Driver’s Side ............23, 36

Unlock From The Passenger Side ..........23, 36

Keyless Entry System .......................22

Keyless Go...............................12

INDEX 687

Keys ...................................12

Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............165

Lane Change Assist........................165

LaneSense ..............................214

Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................50

Latches ................................112

Lead Free Gasoline ........................524

Leaks, Fluid .............................112

Life Of Tires .............................510

Light Bulbs .......................112,639, 646

Light Replacement .....................639, 646

Lights ...........................112,159, 639

AirBag ........................82, 110, 322

Automatic Headlights ....................160

Battery Saver ..........................169

Brake Assist Warning ....................485

Brake Warning .........................323

Bulb Replacement ....................641, 646

Cruise ........................348, 349, 350

Daytime Running .......................162

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............164, 165

Engine Temperature Warning ...............326

Exterior ...........................112,646

Fog..............................163, 647

Front Replacement ......................646

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................545

Headlights .........................159, 641

Headlights On Reminder ..................163

Headlights On With Wipers ................160

Headlight Switch .......................159

High Beam ............................165

High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............165

Illuminated Entry ........................21

Instrument Cluster ......................159

Intensity Control ........................167

Interior ..............................167

License ..............................652

688 INDEX

Lights On Reminder .....................163

Low Fuel .............................340

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........333

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........169

Park ................................346

Passing ..............................165

Reading ...........................166, 272

Seat Belt Reminder ......................321

Security Alarm .........................325

Service ...............................641

Side Marker ........................644, 646

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........337, 514

Traction Control ........................485

Turn Signal ..............112,164, 165, 347, 644

Vanity Mirror ..........................131

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .326, 347

Loading Vehicle ..........................536

Tires ................................495

Locks ..................................31

Automatic Door .........................34

Auto Unlock ...........................34

Child Protection .........................34

Door .................................31

Power Door ............................33

Low Tire Pressure System ...................514

Lubrication, Body .........................605

Lug Nuts ...............................546

Maintenance Free Battery....................599

Maintenance Procedures ....................594

Maintenance Schedule ......................660

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .333, 592

Manual, Service ..........................672

Marker Lights, Side........................644

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................615

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............153

Memory Seat ............................153

INDEX 689

Memory Seats And Radio ...................153

Methanol ...............................525

Mirrors ................................120

Electric Powered ........................129

Electric Remote .........................129

Exterior Folding ........................128

Heated ...............................130

Outside ..............................128

Rearview ..........................120, 121

Vanity ...............................131

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................514

MOPAR Parts.........................593, 671

MTBE/ETBE ............................525

Multi-Function Control Lever .................164

New Vehicle Break-In Period .................107

Occupant Restraints ........................47

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............524, 654

Oil, Engine ..........................595, 654

Capacity .............................653

Change Interval ........................596

Checking .............................595

Dipstick ..............................595

Disposal ..............................598

Filter .............................598, 654

Filter Disposal .........................598

Identification Logo ......................596

Materials Added To ......................598

Pressure Warning Light ...................328

Recommendation ....................596, 653

Synthetic .............................598

Viscosity ..........................597, 653

Oil Filter, Change .........................598

Oil Filter, Selection ........................598

Oil Pressure Light .........................328

Onboar

d Diagnostic System ..................591

690 INDEX

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............274

Operating Precautions ......................591

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4

Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................128

Overhead Console.........................271

Overheating, Engine .......................545

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,672

Paint Care ..............................618

Panic Alarm ..............................24

Parking Brake............................468

ParkSense System, Rear..................220, 229

Passing Light ............................165

Personalized Menu Bar .....................421

Pets ...................................107

Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........496

Power

Brakes ...............................474

Deck Lid Release ........................45

Door Locks ............................33

Mirrors ..............................129

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........293, 296

Sunroof ...........................284, 288

Windows ..............................41

Power Seats

Down ...............................141

Forward ..............................141

Rearward .............................141

Up .................................141

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............57

Preparation For Jacking .....................560

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ..............................58

Radial Ply Tires ..........................503

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........612

Radio Frequency

General Information ............16, 18, 27, 30, 40

INDEX 691

Radio Operation ..........................396

Radio Remote Controls .....................395

Radio (Sound Systems) .....................394

Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................174

Rear Camera ............................268

Rear Cupholder ..........................298

Rear ParkSense System ..................220, 229

Rear Seat, Folding .........................152

Rear Window Defroster .....................308

Rear Window Features .....................308

Recorder, Event Data .......................85

Recreational Towing .......................539

Reformulated Gasoline .....................525

Refrigerant ..............................601

Reminder, Lights On .......................163

Reminder, Seat Belt.........................49

Remote Control

Starting System .........................27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

Lock The Doors .........................24

Panic Alarm ............................24

Programming Additional Key Fobs .........18, 25

Programming Additional Transmitters .......18, 25

Remote Battery Replacement ................25

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..............13, 22

Transmitter Battery Replacement .............25

Unlatch The Trunk .......................24

Unlock The Doors .......................23

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........395

Remote Starting

Enter Remote Start Mode ..................29

EVIC Remote Start Abort Message ............28

Exit Remote Start Mode ...................30

How To Use Remote Start ..................28

Remote Starting System ...................27

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The

Vehicle ...............................30

692 INDEX

Remote Starting System......................27

Remote Trunk Release.......................45

Replacement Bulbs ........................639

Replacement Parts.........................593

Replacement Tires .........................510

Reporting Safety Defects ....................671

Restraint, Head...........................148

Restraints, Child...........................86

Restraints, Occupant ........................47

Rotation, Tires ...........................513

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................110

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................112

Safety Defects, Reporting ....................671

Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................109

Safety Information, Tire .....................488

Safety Tips ..............................108

Schedule, Maintenance .....................660

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......55

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........58

Energy Management Feature ................58

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................53

Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................50

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............55

Pregnant Women ........................57

Seat Belt Extender .......................56

Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................58

Seat Belt Reminder .......................49

Seat Belt System .........................47

Seat Belt Maintenance ......................624

Seat Belt Reminder .........................49

Seat Belts.............................48, 110

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................55

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........55

Child Restraint ..........................86

Extender ..............................56

INDEX 693

Front Seat ........................48, 50, 53

Inspection ............................110

Operating Instructions ....................53

Pregnant Women ........................57

Pretensioners ...........................58

Rear Seat ..............................50

Reminder .............................321

Untwisting Procedure .....................55

Seats............................140, 141, 146

Adjustment .....................140, 141, 144

Easy Entry ............................156

Head Restraints ........................148

Heated ...............................146

Memory ..............................153

Rear Folding ..........................152

Seatback Release ........................145

Tilting ...............................145

Vented ...............................147

Ventilated .............................147

Security Alarm ...........................325

Arm The System ........................19

Disarm The System .......................20

Rearming The System .....................19

Security Alarm ..........................19

Tamper Alert ...........................21

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............654

SENTRY KEY

Immobilizer ............................16

Key Programming .......................18

Replacement Keys .......................18

Service Assistance .........................667

Service Contract ..........................669

Service Manuals ..........................672

Shifting

Automatic Transmission ..................453

Shoulder Belts ............................50

Side View Mirror Adjustment.................128

Signals, Turn...................112,165, 347, 644

694 INDEX

Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................512

Snow Tires ..............................505

Spare Tire.....................506, 507, 508, 559

Spark Plugs .............................654

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) .........................654

Oil..................................654

Speed Control

Accel/Decel ........................179, 181

Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ..................189

Cancel ...............................179

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............177, 182

Starting..............................27, 447

Cold Weather ..........................448

Engine Fails To Start .....................449

Remote ...............................27

Starting And Operating .....................447

Starting Procedures ........................447

Steering

Column Controls .......................164

Column Lock ..........................175

Tilt Column ...........................175

Wheel, Heated .........................176

Wheel, Tilt ............................175

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............395

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .395

Storage ................................638

Storage, Vehicle .......................418, 638

Storing Your Vehicle .......................638

Stuck, Freeing............................576

Sunglasses Storage ........................273

Sun Roof ............................284, 288

Sun Visor Extension .......................131

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........62

Synthetic Engine Oil .......................598

System, Remote Starting .....................27

INDEX 695

Telescoping Steering Column .................175

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........416

Tilt Steering Column .......................175

Time Delay, Headlight ......................160

Tip Start................................448

Tire And Loading Information Placard .......495, 496

Tire Markings ............................488

Tires.........................112,500, 506, 673

Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................510

Air Pressure ...........................500

Chains ...............................512

Changing .............................558

Compact Spare .........................507

General Information ..................500, 506

High Speed ...........................503

Inflation Pressures .......................502

Jacking ...........................558, 561

Life Of Tires ...........................510

Load Capacity ......................495, 497

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....358, 370, 514

Pressure Warning Light ...................337

Quality Grading ........................673

Radial ...............................503

Replacement ...........................510

Rotation ..............................513

Safety ............................488, 500

Sizes ................................489

Snow Tires ............................505

Spare Tire ...................506, 507, 508, 559

Spinning .............................508

Tread Wear Indicators ....................509

Tire Safety Information .....................488

Tire Service Kit........................548, 550

To Open Hood ...........................157

Towing ................................538

Disabled

Vehicle ........................581

Recreational ...........................539

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........539

Traction .............................464, 465

696 INDEX

Traction Control ..........................481

Trailer Towing ...........................538

Transaxle ...............................451

Automatic ............................451

Autostick .............................461

Operation .............................451

Transmission ............................453

Automatic .........................453, 616

Maintenance ...........................616

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....274

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........22

Transporting Pets .........................107

Tread Wear Indicators ......................509

Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .....................45, 46

Trunk Release, Emergency ....................46

Trunk Release Remote Control .................45

Turn Signals ......................165, 347, 644

Uconnect

Operation .............................394

Uconnect Settings .....................23, 24

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition

Additional Information ...................442

Do Not Disturb ........................440

General Information .....................441

Siri Eyes Free ..........................440

Uconnect Access

Vehicle Health Alert .....................434

Uconnect Settings .....................23, 24, 34

Uconnect Voice Command ...................421

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................673

Universal Transmitter ......................274

Unleaded Gasoline ........................524

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................55

Vanity Mirrors ...........................131

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6

INDEX 697

Vehicle Loading .......................497, 536

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7

Vehicle Storage........................418, 638

Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................597

Voice Recognition System (VR)................421

Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................545

Warnings And Cautions ......................6

Warranty Information ......................671

Washers, Windshield....................170, 606

Washing Vehicle ..........................619

Water

Driving Through ........................465

Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................620

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................620

Wind Buffeting .....................44, 287, 292

Window Fogging .........................419

Windows ................................41

Auto Down ............................42

Driver/Passenger Window Controls ...........41

Express Up And Down ....................43

Power ................................41

Power Windows .........................41

Rear Passenger Window Controls .............41

Reset Auto-Up ..........................44

Wind Buffeting ..........................44

Window Controls ........................41

Window Lockout ........................44

Windshield Defroster.......................110

Windshield Washers ....................170, 606

Fluid ................................606

Windshield Wiper Blades....................605

Windshield Wipers ........................170

Wiper Blade Replacement ...................605

Wipers, Intermittent .......................171

Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................174

Wrecker Towing ..........................581

698 INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

First Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS

16UF-126-AA

Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

16UF-126-AB

Second Edition